Easergy MiCOM P64x M/Gb3 setting parameters & highlights (SC5014)


Overview

Easergy MiCOM P64x series provides fast and complete protection for transformer faults, preserving service life and is designed for two and three winding transformers (including autotransformers).

For more detailed information on “Easergy MiCOM P64x” relays, refer to Schneider protection relays manuals.

To see other supported devices, click here.

This post covers the specific versions of the MiCOM products with:

  • Hardware suffix: L (P642) M (P643/P645)
  • Software sufix: B6 (P643) & B5 (P642/P643/P645)

Configuration menu

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
CONFIGURATION 09 00    
This column contains CONFIGURATION parameters.
Restore Defaults 09 01 No Operation No operation, All settings, Setting Group 1, Setting Group 2, Setting Group 3, or Setting Group 4
Setting to restore a setting group to factory default settings.
Setting Group 09 02 Menu Select from Menu or Select from PSL
Allows setting group changes to be initiated using 2 DDB signals in the programmable scheme logic or from the Menu settings.
Active Settings 09 03 Group 1 Group 1, Group 2, Group 3 or Group 4
Selects the active setting group.
Save Changes 09 04 No Operation No Operation, Save or  Abort
Saves all relay settings.
Copy From 09 05 Group 1 Group 1, Group 2, Group 3 or Group 4
Allows displayed settings to be copied from a selected setting group.
Copy To 09 06 No Operation No Operation, Group 1, Group 2, Group 3 or Group 4
Allows displayed settings to be copied to a selected setting group.
Setting Group 1 09 07 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables Group 1 settings. If the setting group is disabled from the configuration, all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Setting Group 2 09 08 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting Group 2 works in the same way as Setting Group 1.
Setting Group 3 09 09 Disbaled Enabled or Disabled
Setting Group 3 works in the same way as Setting Group 1.
Setting Group 4 09 0A Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting Group 4 works in the same way as Setting Group 1.
Diff Protection 09 0C Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the differential protection.  The unit provides bias differential protection with multiple CT inputs.
REF Protection 09 0E Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the Restricted Earth Fault protection.  The unit provides a low impedance REF function per transformer winding.
Over Current 09 10 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the overcurrent protection: ANSI 50/51/67P, 46OC.
NPS OverCurrent 09 11 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the Negative Phase Sequence overcurrent protection: ANSI 50/51/67P, 46OC.
Thermal Overload 09 12 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the Thermal Overload Protection: ANSI 49.
Earth Fault 09 13 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the Earth Fault Protection: ANSI 50N/51N.
Residual O/V NVD 09 16 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the Residual Overvoltage (Neutral Voltage Displacement) Protection function: ANSI 59N.
Overfluxing 09 18 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the Overfluxing protection: ANSI 24.
Through Fault 09 1B Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the Through Fault function.  The Through Fault current monitoring function in the P64x gives the fault current level, the duration of the faulty condition, the date and time.
Volt Protection 09 1D Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the Voltage Protection (Under/Overvoltage and NPS Overvoltage) function: ANSI 27/59/47.
Freq Protection 09 1E Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the Frequency Protection (Under/Overfrequency) function: ANSI 81O/U.
RTD Inputs 09 1F Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the RTD (Resistance Temperature Device) Inputs.
CB Fail 09 20 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the Circuit Breaker Fail Protection function: ANSI 50BF.
Supervision 09 21 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the Supervision (VTS&CTS) functions: ANSI VTS/CTS.
Input Labels 09 25 Visible Invisible or  Visible
Sets the Input Labels menu visible in the relay settings menu.
Output Labels 09 26 Visible Invisible or  Visible
NOT USED.
Sets the Output Labels menu to visible in the relay settings menu.
RTD Lables 09 27 Visible Invisible or  Visible
Sets the RTD Labels menu visible in the relay settings menu.
CT and VT Ratios 09 28 Visible Invisible or  Visible
Sets the Current & Voltage Transformer Ratios menu visible in the relay settings menu.
Record Control 09 29 Visible Invisible or  Visible
Sets the Record Control menu visible in the relay settings menu.
Disturb Recorder 09 2A Visible Invisible or  Visible
Sets the Disturbance Recorder menu visible in the relay settings menu.
Measure’t Setup 09 2B Visible Invisible or  Visible
Sets the Measurement Setup menu visible in the relay settings menu.
Comms Settings 09 2C Visible Invisible or  Visible
Sets the Communications Settings menu visible in the relay settings menu.  These are the settings associated with the 1st and 2nd rear communications ports.
Commission Tests 09 2D Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Commissioning Tests menu visible in the relay settings menu.
Setting Values 09 2E Primary Primary or Secondary
This affects all protection settings that are dependent on CT and VT ratios.
Control Inputs 09 2F Visible Invisible or  Visible
Sets the Control Inputs menu visible in the relay setting menu.
CLIO Inputs 09 30 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the CLIO (Current Loop Input Output) function.
CLIO Outputs 09 31 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables (activates) or disables (turns off) the CLIO (Current Loop Input Output) Outputs function.
CLIO status (Hidden) 09 32 Hidden False or True
CLIO status (Hidden).
No Courier text. Cell value set to False if CLIO not fitted and Cell value set to True if CLIO is fitted.
Control I/P Config 09 35 Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Control Input Configuration menu visible in the relay setting menu.
Ctrl I/P Labels 09 36 Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Control Input Labels menu visible in the relay setting menu.
Direct Access 09 39 Enabled Enabled, Disabled or Hotkey Only
Defines what controls are available using the direct access keys – Enabled (Hotkey and CB Control functions) / Hotkey Only (Control Inputs and Setting group selection) / CB Cntrl Only (CB open/close).
PB CONFIG 09 48 Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the PB CONFIG menu visible in the relay setting menu.
IEC GOOSE 09 49 Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the IEC 61850 GOOSE menu visible in the relay setting menu.
Function Keys 09 50 Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Function Key menu visible in the relay setting menu.
VIR I/P Labels 09 70 Invisible Invisible or Visible
VIR I/P Labels Visible/Invisible
VIR O/P Labels 09 80 Invisible Invisible or Visible
VIR O/P Labels Visible/Invisible
Usr Alarm Labels 09 90 Invisible Invisible or Visible
USR Alarm Labels Visible/Invisible
RP1 Read Only 09 FB Disabled Enabled, Disabled
Visible when comms options are:
1 – Courier                       3 – CS103           6 – IEC61850 with 1st Rear Courier,             7 – IEC61850 with 1st Rear CS103.
RP2 Read Only 09 FC Disabled Enabled, Disabled
Visible when comms options are:
1 – Courier, or                  3 – CS103; and hardware options are: 7, 8, E or F.
NIC Read Only 09 FD Disabled Enabled, Disabled
Visible when comms options are:   6 – IEC61850 with 1st Rear Courier,             7 – IEC61850 with 1st Rear CS103.
SettingValueBeh. 09 FE Independent 0 = Independent or 1 = Locked Mode
Independent: cell [092E] Setting Values will be independent in each interface. For example, the Front Port can have [092E] set to Secondary and a remote port can have [092E] set to Primary.
Locked Mode: cell [092E] Setting Values are locked to the same value for all interfaces. All interfaces have the same value for [092E]. Whichever interface selects Locked Mode will have its setting for [092E] applied to all interfaces. Any interface can then change [092E] and it will apply on all interfaces.
LCD Contrast 09 FF 11 0 to 31 step 1
To confirm the LCD contrast press the right and left arrow keys together instead of Enter. This prevents someone selecting a black or blank contrast setting by accident. Note: The contrast can be set through the FP comms port using the MiCOM software.

System Config

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1: SYSTEM CONFIG 30 00    
This column contains GROUP 1 SYSTEM CONFIG parameters
Winding Config 30 01 HV+LV+TV HV+LV or           HV+LV+TV
P643 and P645 only.
This setting indicates if the protected transformer is a two or three winding transformer.
Winding Type 30 02 Conventional Conventional or Auto
The winding type may be configured as Conventional or Auto. This setting is just for information.
HV CT Terminals 30 03 01 (P642) 01 (P642)
Each digit corresponds to a terminal. For further detailed connections refer to the installation section. P642 only – from right to left the current inputs are T1, T2. 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled.
LV CT Terminals 30 04 10 (P645) 10 (P642)
P642 only.
Each digit corresponds to a terminal. From right to left the current inputs are T1, T2. 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled For further detailed connections refer to the installation section.
TV CT Terminals 30 05 010 (P643) 010 (P643)
P643 only.
Each digit corresponds to a terminal. From right to left the current inputs are T1, T2, T3. 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled For further detailed connections refer to the installation section.
Sref 30 07 100MVA 0.1MVA to 5000MVA step 0.1MVA
Reference power. Used by the differential function to calculate the ratio correction factors. Used by the thermal function when the monitored winding is set to biased current.
HV Connection 30 08 Y-Wye Y-Wye, D-Delta or Z-Zigzag
The HV winding connections can be configured as Wye, Delta, or Zigzag.
HV Grounding 30 09 Grounded Grounded or Ungrounded
In Simple mode:
Grounded = P64x filters zero sequence current on HV side. Ungrounded = no zero sequence filtering is done on HV side. In Advanced mode:
Grounding = Information only, and zero sequence filtering depends on Zero seq filt HV setting.
HV Nominal 30 0A 220kV 100V to 1MV step 1V
Nominal voltage of the HV winding, mid-tap voltage of the on-load tap changer, or no-load tap changer tap voltage.
HV Rating 30 0B 100MVA 0.1MVA to 5000MVA step 0.1MVA
This rating is used by the thermal overload function if the monitored winding is set to HV.
% Reactance 30 0C 0.1 1% to 100% step 0.63%
Transformer leakage reactance.
LV Vector Group 30 0D 0 0 to 11 step 1
This is used to provide vector correction for phase shift between HV and LV windings.
LV Connection 30 0E Y-Wye Y-Wye, D-Delta or Z-Zigzag
The LV winding connections can be configured as Wye, Delta, or Zigzag.
LV Grounding 30 0F Grounded Grounded or Ungrounded
When set as grounded, the P64x filters the zero sequence current in the LV side. When set as ungrounded, no zero sequence filtering is done in the LV side.
LV Nominal 30 10 220kV 100V to 1MV step 1V
Nominal voltage of the LV winding, mid-tap voltage of the on-load tap changer, or no-load tap changer tap voltage.
LV Rating 30 11 100MVA 0.1MVA to 5000MVA step 0.1MVA
This rating is used by the thermal overload function if the monitored winding is set to LV.
TV Vector Group 30 12 0 0 to 11 step 1
P643 and P645 only.
This is used to provide vector correction for phase shift between HV and TV windings.
TV Connection 30 13 Y-Wye Y-Wye,D-Delta or Z-Zigzag
P643 and P645 only.
The winding connections can be configured as Wye, Delta, or Zigzag.
TV Grounding 30 14 Grounded Grounded or Ungrounded
P643 and P645 only. Simple:
Grounded = P64x filters zero sequence current on TV side. Ungrounded = no zero sequence filtering is done on LV side. Advanced:
Grounding = Information only, and zero sequence filtering depends on Zero seq filt HV setting.
TV Nominal 30 15 220kV 100V to 1MV step 1V
P643 and P645 only.
Nominal voltage of the TV winding.
TV Rating 30 16 100MVA 0.1MVA to 5000MVA step 0.1MVA
P643 and P645 only.
This rating is used by the thermal overload function if the monitored winding is set to TV.
Match Factor CT1 30 20 Set by relay Set by relay
CT1 ratio correction factor used by the differential function.
Match Factor CT2 30 21 Set by relay Set by relay
CT2 ratio correction factor used by the differential function.
Match Factor CT3 30 22 Set by relay Set by relay
P643 and P645 only.
CT3 ratio correction factor used by the differential function.
Match Factor CT4 30 23 Set by relay Set by relay
P645 only.
CT4 ratio correction factor used by the differential function.
Match Factor CT5 30 24 Set by relay Set by relay
P645 only.
CT5 ratio correction factor used by the differential function.
MatchFac REF HV 30 25 Set by relay Set by relay
Ratio correction factor used by REF HV protection.
MatchFac REF LV 30 26 Set by relay Set by relay
Ratio correction factor used by REF LV protection.
MatchFac REF TV 30 27 Set by relay Set by relay
P643 and P645 only.
Ratio correction factor used by REF TV protection.
MatchFac REFAuto 30 28 Set by relay Set by relay
Ratio correction factor used by REF Auto protection.
Phase Sequence 30 5E Standard ABC Standard ABC or Reverse ACB
This sets the phase rotation. It affects the positive and negative sequence quantities calculated by the relay. It also affects functions that are dependent on phase quantities.
VT Reversal 30 5F No Swap No Swap, A-B Swap or C-A Swap
P643 and P645 only.
For applications where 2-phase current inputs are swapped.
CT1 Reversal 30 60 No Swap No Swap, A-B Swap or C-A Swap
For applications where 2-phase current inputs are swapped.
CT2 Reversal 30 61 No Swap No Swap, A-B Swap or C-A Swap
For applications where 2-phase current inputs are swapped.
CT3 Reversal 30 62 No Swap No Swap, A-B Swap or C-A Swap
P643 and P645 only.
For applications where 2-phase current inputs are swapped.
CT4 Reversal 30 63 No Swap No Swap, A-B Swap or C-A Swap
P645 only.
For applications where 2-phase current inputs are swapped.
CT5 Reversal 30 64 No Swap No Swap, A-B Swap or C-A Swap
P645 only.
For applications where 2-phase current inputs are swapped.

Differential Protection

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1:
DIFF PROTECTION
31 00    
This column contains the GROUP 1 DIFF PROTECTION parameters
Trans Diff 31 01 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
This enables or disables differential protection for setting group1.
Set Mode 31 02 Simple Simple or Advanced
Defines Simple or Advanced Mode, as per HV/LV/TV Grounding.
Advanced = zero sequence filtering enabled/disabled in Zero seq filt HV/LV/TV.
Simple = Is-HS1 calculated as 1/Xt (Xt=transformer reactance); and Zero seq filt HV/LV/TV, Is-HS1 and Is-Hs2 hidden
Is1 31 03 0.2 0.1pu to 2.5pu step 0.01pu
Minimum differential threshold of the low set differential characteristic
K1 31 04 0.3 0% to 200% step 1%
First slope setting of the low set differential characteristic
Is2 31 05 1 0.1pu to 20pu step 0.01pu
Bias current threshold for the second slope of the low set differential characteristic
K2 31 06 0.8 15% to 200% step 1%
Second slope setting of the low set differential characteristic
tDiff 31 07 0s 0 to 10s step 10ms
Differential time delay
Is-CTS 31 08 1.5 0.1pu to 2.5pu step 0.01pu
In restrain mode, the differential protection Is1 setting is increased to Is-CTS setting after CT failure is detected.  The Is-CTS setting increases the restrain region of the differential characteristic
Is-HS1 31 10 1/Xt 2.00pu to 32pu step 0.1pu
High set element one. In the simple mode the relay calculates Is-HS1 as 1/Xt.  Where Xt is the transformer reactance. This setting is hidden in simple mode.  In advance mode Is-HS1 is visible and settable.
HS2 Status 31 11 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enable or Disabled High set element two
Is-HS2 31 12 32 2.00pu to 32pu step 0.1pu
High Set element two when HS2 Status is enabled. When HS2 Status is enabled, High set element two. In the simple mode the relay calculates Is-HS2 as 1/Xt.  Where Xt is the transformer reactance. This setting is hidden in simple mode.  In advance mode Is-HS2 is visible and settable.
Diff calc remove 31 13 Disabled Disabled or TV
P643 and P645 only.
Disable means diff protection is same as usual, ‘TV’ means phase currents of the ends which belong to TV are no effect on trans diff protection. This setting is only settable in advance mode.
Transient Bias 31 14 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Default setting ‘Enabled’ means trans diff protection is same as version B2A, ‘Disabled ‘ means the transient bias is removed from bias current for all cases.
Zero seq filt HV 31 20 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables zero sequence filtering on the HV winding. This setting is only visible and settable in advance mode.
Zero seq filt LV 31 21 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables zero sequence filtering on the LV winding. This setting is only visible and settable in advance mode.
Zero seq filt TV 31 22 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables zero sequence filtering on the TV winding. This setting is only visible and settable in advance mode.
2nd harm blocked 31 28 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
2nd harm blocked
Ih(2)%> 31 29 0.2 5% to 50% step 1%
Second harmonic blocking threshold
Cross blocking 31 2A Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables cross blocking
CTSat and NoGap 31 2B Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables CT saturation detection
5th harm blocked 31 33 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables 5th harmonic blocking
Ih(5)%> 31 34 0.35 0% to 100% step 1%
Fifth harmonic blocking threshold
Circuitry Fail 31 40 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the circuitry fail alarm
Is-cctfail 31 41 0.1 0.03pu to 1pu step 0.01pu
Minimum differential threshold of the circuitry fail alarm
K-cctfail 31 42 0.1 0% to 50% step 1%
Slope for the circuitry fail alarm function
CctFail Delay 31 43 5s 0s to 10s step 0.1s
Sets the circuitry fail alarm time delay

Restricted Earth Fault (REF) Protection

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1:
REF PROTECTION
32 00    
This column contains GROUP1 REF PROTECTION parameters.
REF HV status 32 01 LowZ REF Disabled, LowZ REF or HighZ REF
Select to be HighZ REF or LowZ REF or disable for the HV winding
Neutral CT Input 32 02 TN1 TN1
 
HV IS1 Set 32 03 0.09 0.02In to 1In step 0.01In
Minimum differential threshold of the HV restricted earth fault characteristic
HV IS2 Set 32 04 0.9 0.1In to 10In step 0.1In
Bias current threshold for the second slope of the HV restricted earth fault characteristic
HV IREF K1 32 05 0 0% to 150% step 1%
First slope setting of the HV REF characteristic.  Normally set to 0% to give optimum sensitivity for internal faults
HV IREF K2 32 06 1.5 15% to 150% step 1%
Second slope setting of the HV REF characteristic.  Normally set to 150% to ensure adequate restraint for external faults.
HV tREF 32 07 0s 0.01s
Operating time delay for the HV  REF element
HV IREF>Is 32 08 0.09 0.02In to 1In step 0.01In
Threshold of the HV HighZ restricted earth fault.
HV Trans.Bias 32 09 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Default setting ‘Enabled’ means REF protection is same as version B2A, ‘Disabled ‘ means the transient bias is removed from bias current for all cases.
REF LV status 32 20 Disabled Disabled, LowZ REF or HighZ REF
Select to be HighZ REF or LowZ REF or disable for the LV winding
Neutral CT Input 32 21 TN2 TN2
 
LV IS1 Set 32 22 0.09 0.02In to 1In step 0.01In
Minimum differential threshold of the LV  REF characteristic
LV IS2 Set 32 23 0.9 0.1In to 10In step 0.1In
Bias current threshold for the second slope of the LV REF characteristic
LV IREF K1 32 24 0 0% to 150% step 1%
First slope setting of the LV REF characteristic.  Normally set to 0% to give optimum sensitivity for internal faults
LV IREF K2 32 25 1.5 15% to 150% step 1%
Second slope setting of the LV REF characteristic.  Normally set to 150% to ensure adequate restraint for external faults.
LV tREF 32 26 0s 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Operating time delay for the LV restricted earth fault element
LV IREF>Is 32 27 0.09 0.02In to 1In step 0.01In
Threshold of the LV HighZ restricted earth fault.
LV Trans.Bias 32 28 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Default setting ‘Enabled’ means REF protection is same as version B2A, ‘Disabled ‘ means the transient bias is removed from bias current for all cases.
REF TV status 32 30 Disabled Disabled, LowZ REF or HighZ REF
P643 and P645 only.
Select to be HighZ REF or LowZ REF or disable for the LV winding
Neutral CT Input 32 31 TN3 TN3
P643 and P645 only.
TV IS1 Set 32 32 0.09 0.02In to 1In step 0.01In
P643 and P645 only.
Minimum differential threshold of the TV  REF characteristic
TV IS2 Set 32 33 0.9 0.1In to 10In step 0.1In
P643 and P645 only.
Bias current threshold for the second slope of the TV REF characteristic
TV IREF K1 32 34 0 0% to 150% step 1%
P643 and P645 only.
First slope setting of the TV REF characteristic.  Normally set to 0% to give optimum sensitivity for internal faults
TV IREF K2 32 35 1.5 15% to 150% step 1%
P643 and P645 only.
Second slope setting of the TV REF characteristic.  Normally set to 150% to ensure adequate restraint for external faults
TV tREF 32 36 0s 0s to 10s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay for the TV restricted earth fault element
TV IREF>Is 32 37 0.09 0.02In to 1In step 0.01In
P643 and P645 only.
Threshold of the TV HighZ restricted earth fault.
TV Trans.Bias 32 38 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Default setting ‘Enabled’ means REF protection is same as version B2A, ‘Disabled ‘ means the transient bias is removed from bias current for all cases.
REF Auto status 32 40 LowZ REF Disabled, LowZ REF or HighZ REF
Enables or disables restricted earth fault protection for the Auto
Neutral CT Input 32 41 TN1 TN1
Indicates which single phase CT is used for Auto REF calculation.
Auto IS1 Set 32 42 0.09 0.02In to 1In step 0.01In
Minimum differential threshold of the Auto REF characteristic
Auto IS2 Set 32 43 0.9 0.1In to 10In step 0.1In
Bias current threshold for the second slope of the Auto REF characteristic
Auto IREF K1 32 44 0 0% to 150% step 1%
First slope setting of the Auto REF characteristic.  Normally set to 0% to give optimum sensitivity for internal faults
Auto IREF K2 32 45 1.5 15% to 150% step 1%
Second slope setting of the Auto REF characteristic.  Normally set to 150% to ensure adequate restraint for external faults
Auto tREF 32 46 0s 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Operating time delay for the Auto restricted earth fault element
Auto IS1 Set 32 47 0.09 0.02In to 1In step 0.01In
Threshold of the Auto HighZ restricted earth fault.
Auto Trans.Bias 32 48 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Default setting ‘Enabled’ means REF protection is same as version B2A,
‘Disabled ‘ means the transient bias is removed from bias current for all cases.

NPS Overcurrent Protection

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1:
NPS OVER          ENT
34 00    
This column contains GROUP 1: NPS OVERCURRENT parameters
NPS O/C 1 34 01 T1 Disabled, HV Winding, LV Winding, TV Winding, T1, T2, T3, T4 or T5
Negative Sequence Overcurrent 1
I2>1 Status 34 02 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables stage 1 of NPS OC 1
I2>1 Char 34 03 DT (DT) DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Slelect the stage 1 of NPSOC element 1 time characteristic
I2>1 Direction 34 04 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>1 Current Set 34 05 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
Current pick-up setting for the stage 1 NPS element 1
I2>1 Time Delay 34 06 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Operating time delay for the stage 1 NPS overcurrent element 1
I2>1 TMS 34 07 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of IEC IDMT characteristic
I2>1 Time Dial 34 08 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time dial setting to adjust the operating time of IEEE/US IDMT characteristic
I2>1 K(RI) 34 09 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the oprating time for the RI IDMT characteristic
I2>1 Reset Char 34 0A DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I2>1 tReset 34 0B 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determine the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I2>2 Status 34 12 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables stage 2 of NPS OC 1
I2>2 Char 34 13 DT (DT) DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Slelect stage 2 of NPSOC element 1 time characteristic
I2>2 Direction 34 14 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>2 Current Set 34 15 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
Current pick-up setting for the stage 2 NPS element 1
I2>2 Time Delay 34 16 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Operating time delay for the stage 2 NPS overcurrent element 1
I2>2 TMS 34 17 1s 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of IEC IDMT characteristic
I2>2 Time Dial 34 18 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time dial setting to adjust the operating time of IEEE/US IDMT characteristic
I2>2 K(RI) 34 19 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the oprating time for the RI IDMT characteristic
I2>2 Reset Char 34 1A DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I2>2 tReset 34 1B 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determine the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I2>3 Status 34 21 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables stage 3 NPS definite time element 1
I2>3 Direction 34 22 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>3 Current Set 34 23 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
Current pick-up setting for the stage 3 NPS element 1
I2>3 Time Delay 34 24 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Operating time delay for the stage 3 NPS overcurrent element 1
I2>4 Status 34 27 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables stage 4 NPS definite time element 1
I2>4 Direction 34 28 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>4 Current Set 34 29 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
Current pick-up setting for the stage 4 NPS element 1
I2>4 Time Delay 34 2A 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Operating time delay for the stage 4 NPS overcurrent element 1
I2> VTS Block 34 2D 15 4-bit binary setting
Logic settings that determine whether VT supervision will block selected negative sequence overcurrent stages. VTS Block only affects directional overcurrent protection. Setting 0 allows continued non-directional operation
I2> V2pol Set 34 2E 5*V1 0.5*V1 to 25*V1 step 0.5*V1
The minimum threshold above which the relay must detect a polarizing voltage for the negative phase sequence directional elements to operate
I2> Char Angle 34 2F -60° -95° to 95° step 1°’
Characteristic angle for directionalized NPS fault protection
NPS O/C 2 34 31 P642: T2 P643: T3 P645: T5 Disabled, HV Winding, LV Winding, TV Winding, T1, T2, T3, T4 or T5
Negative Sequence Overcurrent 2
I2>1 Status 34 32 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables stage 1 of NPS OC 2
I2>1 Char 34 33 DT (DT) DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Slelect stage 1 of NPSOC element 2 time characteristic
I2>1 Direction 34 34 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>1 Current Set 34 35 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
Current pick-up setting for the stage 1 NPS element 2
I2>1 Time Delay 34 36 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Operating time delay for the stage 1 NPS overcurrent element 2
I2>1 TMS 34 37 1s 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of IEC IDMT characteristic
I2>1 Time Dial 34 38 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time dial setting to adjust the operating time of IEEE/US IDMT characteristic
I2>1 K(RI) 34 39 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the oprating time for the RI IDMT characteristic
I2>1 Reset Char 34 3A DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I2>1 tReset 34 3B 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determine the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I2>2 Status 34 42 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables stage 2 NPS OC 2
I2>2 Char 34 43 DT (DT) DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Slelect stage 2 of NPSOC element 2 time characteristic
I2>2 Direction 34 44 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>2 Current Set 34 45 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
Current pick-up setting for the stage 2 NPS element 2
I2>2 Time Delay 34 46 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Operating time delay for the stage 2 NPS overcurrent element 2
I2>2 TMS 34 47 1s 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of IEC IDMT characteristic
I2>2 Time Dial 34 48 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time dial setting to adjust the operating time of IEEE/US IDMT characteristic
I2>2 K(RI) 34 49 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the oprating time for the RI IDMT characteristic
I2>2 Reset Char 34 4A DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I2>2 tReset 34 4B 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determine the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I2>3 Status 34 51 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables stage 3 NPS OC 2
I2>3 Direction 34 52 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>3 Current Set 34 53 0.2 24A to 1200A step 3A
Current pick-up setting for the stage 3 NPS OC 2
I2>3 Time Delay 34 54 10 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Operating time delay for the stage 3 NPS OC 2
I2>4 Status 34 57 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables stage 4 NPS OC 2
I2>4 Direction 34 58 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>4 Current Set 34 59 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
Current pick-up setting for the stage 4 OC 2
I2>4 Time Delay 34 5A 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Operating time delay for the stage 4 NPS OC2
I2> VTS Block 34 5D 15 4-bit binary setting
Logic settings that determine whether VT supervision will block selected negative sequence overcurrent stages. VTS Block only affects directional overcurrent protection. Setting 0 allows continued non-directional operation
I2> V2pol Set 34 5E 5*V1 0.5*V1 to 25*V1 step 0.5*V1
The minimum threshold above which the relay must detect a polarizing voltage for the negative phase sequence directional elements to operate
I2> Char Angle 34 5F -60° -95° to 95° step 1°
Characteristic angle for directionalized NPS fault protection
NPS O/C 3 34 61 P643: T2 P645: T3 Disabled, HV Winding, LV Winding, TV Winding, T1, T2, T3, T4 or T5
P643 and P645 only.
Negetive Sequence Overcurrent 3
I2>1 Status 34 62 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables stage 1 of NPS OC 3
I2>1 Char 34 63 DT (DT) DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
P643 and P645 only.
Slelect stage 1 of NPSOC element 3 time characteristic
I2>1 Direction 34 64 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>1 Current Set 34 65 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
P643 and P645 only.
Current pick-up setting for the stage 1 NPS element 3
I2>1 Time Delay 34 66 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay for the stage 1 NPS overcurrent element 3
I2>1 TMS 34 67 1s 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of IEC IDMT characteristic
I2>1 Time Dial 34 68 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time dial setting to adjust the operating time of IEEE/US IDMT characteristic
I2>1 K(RI) 34 69 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the oprating time for the RI IDMT characteristic
I2>1 Reset Char 34 6A DT DT or Inverse
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I2>1 tReset 34 6B 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Setting that determine the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I2>2 Status 34 72 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables stage 2 of NPS OC 3
I2>2 Char 34 73 DT (DT) DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
P643 and P645 only.
Slelect stage 2 of NPSOC element 3 time characteristic
I2>2 Direction 34 74 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>2 Current Set 34 75 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
P643 and P645 only.
Current pick-up setting for the stage 2 NPS element 3
I2>2 Time Delay 34 76 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay for the stage 2 NPS overcurrent element 3
I2>2 TMS 34 77 1s 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of IEC IDMT characteristic
I2>2 Time Dial 34 78 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time dial setting to adjust the operating time of IEEE/US IDMT characteristic
I2>2 K(RI) 34 79 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the oprating time for the RI IDMT characteristic
I2>2 Reset Char 34 7A DT DT or Inverse
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I2>2 tReset 34 7B 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Setting that determine the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I2>3 Status 34 81 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables stage 3 NPS OC 3
I2>3 Direction 34 82 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>3 Current Set 34 83 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
P643 and P645 only.
Current pick-up setting for the stage 3 NPS OC 3
I2>3 Time Delay 34 84 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay for the stage 3 NPS OC 3
I2>4 Status 34 87 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables stage 4 NPS OC 3
I2>4 Direction 34 88 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
Determines the direction of measurement for this element
I2>4 Current Set 34 89 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
P643 and P645 only.
Current pick-up setting for the stage 4 NPS OC 3
I2>4 Time Delay 34 8A 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay for the stage 4 NPS OC 3
I2> VTS Block 34 8D 15 4-bit binary setting
P643 and P645 only.
Logic settings that determine whether VT supervision will block selected negative sequence overcurrent stages. VTS Block only affects directional overcurrent protection. Setting 0 allows continued non-directional operation
I2> V2pol Set 34 8E 5*V1 0.5*V1 to 25*V1 step 0.5*V1
P643 and P645 only.
The minimum threshold above which the relay must detect a polarizing voltage for the negative phase sequence directional elements to operate
I2> Char Angle 34 8F -60° -95° to 95° step 1°
P643 and P645 only.
Characteristic angle for directionalized NPS fault protection

Overcurrent Protection

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1:
OVERCUR            1
35 00    
This column contains GROUP 1: OVERCURRENT 1 parameters
Overcurrent 1 35 01 T1 Disabled, HV Winding, LV Winding, TV Winding, T1, T2, T3, T4 or T5
Overcurrent 1
I>1 Status 35 02 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage overcurrent element
I>1 Char 35 03 IEC S Inverse DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage overcurrent element
I>1 Direction 35 04 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the first stage element
I>1 Current Set 35 05 1 24A to 1200A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the first stage overcurrent element
I>1 Time Delay 35 06 1s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the first stage element
I>1 TMS 35 07 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
I>1 Time Dial 35 08 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
I>1 K (RI) 35 09 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
I>1 Reset Char 35 0A DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I>1 tRESET 35 0B 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I>2 Status 35 12 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage overcurrent element
I>2 Char 35 13 DT (DT) DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the second stage overcurrent element
I>2 Direction 35 14 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the second stage element
I>2 Current Set 35 15 1 24A to 1200A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the second stage overcurrent element
I>2 Time Delay 35 16 1s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the second stage element.
I>2 TMS 35 17 1s 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
I>2 Time Dial 35 18 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
I>2 K (RI) 35 19 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
I>2 Reset Char 35 1A DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I>2 tRESET 35 1B 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I>3 Status 35 21 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the third stage overcurrent element
I>3 Direction 35 22 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the third stage element
I>3 Current Set 35 23 10A 24A to 3840A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the third stage overcurrent element
I>3 Time Delay 35 24 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the third stage element
I>4 Status 35 27 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the fourth stage overcurrent element
I>4 Direction 35 28 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the fourth stage element
I>4 Current Set 35 29 10 24A to 3840A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the fourth stage overcurrent element
I>4 Time Delay 35 2A 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the fourth stage element.
I> Char Angle 35 2D 30° -95°’ to 95° step ‘1°’
Setting for the relay characteristic angle used for the directional decision
I> Function Link 35 2E 15 4-bit binary setting
Logic Settings that determine whether blocking signals from VT supervision affect certain overcurrent stages
Overcurrent 2 35 31 P642: T2 P643: T3 P645: T5 Disabled, HV Winding, LV Winding, TV Winding, T1, T2, T3, T4 or T5
Overcurrent 2
I>1 Status 35 32 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage overcurrent element
I>1 Char 35 33 IEC S Inverse DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage overcurrent element
I>1 Direction 35 34 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the first stage element
I>1 Current Set 35 35 1 24A to 1200A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the first stage overcurrent element
I>1 Time Delay 35 36 1s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the first stage element
I>1 TMS 35 37 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
I>1 Time Dial 35 38 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
I>1 K (RI) 35 39 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
I>1 Reset Char 35 3A DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I>1 tRESET 35 3B 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I>2 Status 35 42 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage overcurrent element
I>2 Char 35 43 IEC S Inverse DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage overcurrent element
I>2 Direction 35 44 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the second stage element
I>2 Current Set 35 45 1 24A to 1200A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the second stage overcurrent element
I>2 Time Delay 35 46 1 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the second stage element.
I>2 TMS 35 47 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
I>2 Time Dial 35 48 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
I>2 K (RI) 35 49 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
I>2 Reset Char 35 4A DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I>2 tRESET 35 4B 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I>3 Status 35 51 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the third stage overcurrent element
I>3 Direction 35 52 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the third stage element
I>3 Current Set 35 53 10 24A to 3840A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the third stage overcurrent element
I>3 Time Delay 35 54 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the third stage element
I>4 Status 35 57 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the fourth stage overcurrent element
I>4 Direction 35 58 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the fourth stage element
I>4 Current Set 35 59 10 24A to 3840A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the fourth stage overcurrent element
I>4 Time Delay 35 5A 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the fourth stage element.
I> Char Angle 35 5D 30° -95° to 95° step 1°
Setting for the relay characteristic angle used for the directional decision
I> Function Link 35 5E 15 4-bit binary setting
Logic Settings that determine whether blocking signals from VT supervision affect certain overcurrent stages
Overcurrent 3 35 61 P643: T2 P645: T3 P643 and P645 only.
Disabled, HV Winding, LV Winding, TV Winding, T1, T2, T3, T4 or T5
P643 and P645 only. Overcurrent 3
I>1 Status 35 62 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to enable or disable the first stage overcurrent element
I>1 Char 35 63 IEC S Inverse DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage overcurrent element
I>1 Direction 35 64 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the first stage element
I>1 Current Set 35 65 1 24A to 1200A step 3A
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the first stage overcurrent element
I>1 Time Delay 35 66 1 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the first stage element
I>1 TMS 35 67 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
I>1 Time Dial 35 68 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
I>1 K (RI) 35 69 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
I>1 Reset Char 35 6A DT DT or Inverse
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I>1 tRESET 35 6B 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I>2 Status 35 72 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to enable or disable the second stage overcurrent element
I>2 Char 35 73 DT (DT) DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the second stage overcurrent element
 
I>2 Direction 35 74 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the second stage element
I>2 Current Set 35 75 1 24A to 1200A step 3A
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the second stage overcurrent element
I>2 Time Delay 35 76 1 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the second stage element.
I>2 TMS 35 77 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
I>2 Time Dial 35 78 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
I>2 K (RI) 35 79 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
I>2 Reset Char 35 7A DT DT or Inverse
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
I>2 tRESET 35 7B 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I>3 Status 35 81 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to enable or disable the third stage overcurrent element
I>3 Direction 35 82 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the third stage element
I>3 Current Set 35 83 10 24A to 3840A step 3A
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the third stage overcurrent element
I>3 Time Delay 35 84 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the third stage element
I>4 Status 35 87 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to enable or disable the fourth stage overcurrent element
I>4 Direction 35 88 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the fourth stage element
I>4 Current Set 35 89 10 24A to 3840A step 3A
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the fourth stage overcurrent element
I>4 Time Delay 35 8A 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the fourth stage element.
I> Char Angle 35 8D 30° -95° to 95° step 1°
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the relay characteristic angle used for the directional decision
I> Function Link 35 8E 15 4-bit binary setting
P643 and P645 only.
Logic Settings that determine whether blocking signals from VT supervision affect certain overcurrent stages
V DEPENDANT O/C 35 90 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
Sub-Heading for voltage dependant over current
V Dep OC>1 Mode 35 91 VCO 0 = VCO, 1 = VRO
Voltage dependant overcurrent stage 1 mode
V OC>1 35 92 Disabled Disabled, HV Winding, LV Winding, TV Winding, T1, T2, T3, T4 or T5
Enable or disable Voltage dependant overcurrent stage 1
V OC>1 Char 35 93 IEC S Inverse DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage voltage dependant overcurrent element
V OC>1 Direction 35 94 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the first stage element
V OC>1 Curr’ Set 35 95 1 24A to 1200A step 3A
Current pick-up setting for first stage the voltage dependant over current
V OC>1 T Delay 35 96 1 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the first stage element
V OC>1 TMS 35 97 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.025
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
V OC>1 Time Dial 35 98 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
V OC>1 k (RI) 35 99 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
V OC>1 Rst Char 35 9A DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
V OC>1 tRESET 35 9B 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
V OC>1 Angle 35 9C 30° -95° to 95° step 1°
Setting for the relay characteristic angle used for the directional decision
V OC>1 V<1 Set 35 9D 80 5V to 120V step 1V
Sets the voltage V1 threshold at which the current setting of the overcurrent stage/stages becomes reduced, noting that this occurs on a per phase basis.
V OC>1 K Set 35 9E 0.25 0.1 to 1 step 0.25
Sets to determine the overcurrent multiplier factor used to reduce the pick-up overcurrent setting.
V OC>1 V<2 Set 35 9F 60 5V to 120V step 1V
Sets the voltage V2 threshold at which the current setting of the overcurrent stage/stages becomes reduced, noting that this occurs on a per phase basis.
V Dep OC>2 Mode 35 A1 VCO 0 = VCO, 1 = VRO
Allows selection of whether voltage control or voltage restrained should be applied.
V OC>2 35 A2 Disabled Disabled, HV Winding, LV Winding, TV Winding, T1, T2, T3, T4 or T5
Enable or disable Voltage dependant overcurrent stage 2
V OC>2 Char 35 A3 IEC S Inverse DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the second stage voltage dependant overcurrent element
V OC>2 Direction 35 A4 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the second stage element
V OC>2 Curr’ Set 35 A5 1 24A to 1200A step 3A
Current pick-up setting for second stage the voltage dependant over current
V OC>2 T Delay 35 A6 1 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for the second stage element
V OC>2 TMS 35 A7 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.025
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
V OC>2 Time Dial 35 A8 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
V OC>2 k (RI) 35 A9 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
V OC>2 Rst Char 35 AA DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
V OC>2 tRESET 35 AB 0s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
V OC>2 Angle 35 AC 30° -95° to 95° step 1°
Setting for the relay characteristic angle used for the directional decision
V OC>2 V<1 Set 35 AD 80 5V to 120V step 1V
Sets the voltage V1 threshold at which the current setting of the overcurrent stage/stages becomes reduced, noting that this occurs on a per phase basis.
V OC>2 K Set 35 AE 0.25 0.1 to 1 step 0.25
Sets to determine the overcurrent multiplier factor used to reduce the pick-up overcurrent setting.
V OC>2 V<2 Set 35 AF 60 5V to 120V step 1V
Sets the voltage V2 threshold at which the current setting of the overcurrent stage/stages becomes reduced, noting that this
occurs on a per phase basis.

Thermal Overload Protection

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1: THERMAL OVERLOAD 37 00    
This column contains GROUP1: THERMAL OVERLOAD parameters
Monit’d winding 37 11 HV HV, LV, TV or Biased Current
An overall through loading picture of the transformer is provided when the monitor winding is set to Biased Current
Ambient T 37 12 AVERAGE RTD 1 to 10, CLIO 1 to 4 or Average
Ambient temperature
CLI Input Type 37 15 4-20mA 0-1 mA, 0-10m/a, 0-20mA or 4-20mA
This setting is available when Ambient T is set to CLIOx
CLI Minimum 37 16 0 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
This setting is available when Ambient T is set to CLIOx
CLI Maximum 37 17 100 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
This setting is available when Ambient T is set to CLIOx
Average Amb T 37 18 25 -25°C to 75°C step 0.1°C
This setting is available when Ambient T is set to Average
Top Oil Temp 37 21 CALCULATED RTD 1 to 10, CLIO 1 to 4 or Calculated
The top oil temperature may be calculated by the relay, or it may be measured using RTD or CLIO inputs
CLI Input Type 37 24 4-20mA 0 to 3 step 1
This setting is available when Top Oil T is set to CLIOx
CLI Minimum 37 25 0 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
This setting is available when Top Oil T is set to CLIOx
CLI Maximum 37 26 100 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
This setting is available when Top Oil T is set to CLIOx
IB 37 29 1 0.1pu to 4pu step 0.01pu
The relay uses this setting to calculate the ratio of ultimate load to rated load
Rated NoLoadLoss 37 2A 3 0.1 to 100 step 0.1
Ratio of load loss at rated load to no-load loss (iron loss).  The transformer manufacturer should provide this parameter
Hot Spot Overtop 37 2B 25 0.1°C to 200°C step 0.1°C
Hottest spot temperature over top oil temperature setting.  The transformer manufacturer should provide this parameter
Top Oil Overamb 37 2C 55 0.1°C to 200°C step 0.1°C
Top oil temperature over ambient temperature setting.  The transformer manufacturer should provide this parameter
Cooling Mode 37 2D Cooling Mode 1 Cooling Mode 1, Cooling Mode 2, Cooling Mode 3, Cooling Mode 4 or Select via PSL
This setting is uesed to select the cooling Mode
Cooling Mode 1 37 2F Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
This is the Sub-Heading for cooling mode 1. It is visible when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 1 or to be select from PSL
Winding exp m 37 30 0.8 0.01 to 2 step 0.01
Winding exponient m for cooling mode 1, available when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 1 or select from PSL
Oil exp n 37 31 0.8 0.01 to 2 step 0.01
oil exponient n for cooling mode 1, available when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 1 or select from PSL
Cooling Mode 2 37 32 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
This is the Sub-Heading for cooling mode 2. It is visible when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 2 or to be select from PSL
Winding exp m 37 33 0.8 0.01 to 2 step 0.01
Winding exponient m for cooling mode 2, available when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 2 or select from PSL
Oil exp n 37 34 0.8 0.01 to 2 step 0.01
oil exponient n for cooling mode 2, available when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 2 or select from PSL
Cooling Mode 3 37 35 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
This is the Sub-Heading for cooling mode 3. It is visible when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 3 or to be select from PSL
Winding exp m 37 36 0.8 0.01 to 2 step 0.01
Winding exponient m for cooling mode 3, available when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 3 or select from PSL
Oil exp n 37 37 0.8 0.01 to 2 step 0.01
oil exponient n for cooling mode 3, available when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 3 or select from PSL
Cooling Mode 4 37 38 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
This is the Sub-Heading for cooling mode 4. It is visible when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 4 or to be select from PSL
Winding exp m 37 39 0.8 0.01 to 2 step 0.01
Winding exponient m for cooling mode 4, available when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 4 or select from PSL
Oil exp n 37 3A 0.8 0.01 to 2 step 0.01
oil exponient n for cooling mode 4, available when cooling mode is selected to be cooling mode 4 or select from PSL
Hot spot rise co 37 3B 1 0.01 min to 20 min step 0.01 min
Hot spot rise co parameters used to calculate the hot spot temperature
Top oil rise co 37 3C 120 1 min to 1000 min step 1 min
Top oil reis co parameters used to calculate the top oil temperature
Tol Status 37 40 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
This setting enables or disables the three hot spot and the three top oil thermal stages
Hot Spot>1 Set 37 5E 110 deg C 1°C to 300°C step 0.1°C
Hot spot first stage setting.  The suggested temperature limits given by IEEE Std. C57.91-1995 may be used to set it.  See the application chapter for suggested values
tHot Spot>1 Set 37 5F 10 mins 0 min to 60000 min step 1 min
Hot spot first stage time delay setting
Hot Spot>2 Set 37 60 130 deg C 1°C to 300°C step 0.1°C
Hot spot second stage setting.  The suggested temperature limits given by IEEE Std. C57.91-1995 may be used to set it.  See the application chapter for suggested values
tHot Spot>2 Set 37 61 10 mins 0 min to 60000 min step 0.1 min
Hot spot second stage time delay setting
Hot Spot>3 Set 37 62 150 deg C 1°C to 300°C step 0.1°C
Hot spot third stage setting.  The suggested temperature limits given by IEEE Std. C57.91-1995 may be used to set it.  See the application chapter for suggested values
tHot Spot>3 Set 37 63 10 mins 0 min to 60000 min step 1 min
Hot spot third stage time delay setting
Top Oil>1 Set 37 64 70 deg C 1°C to 300°C step 0.1°C
Top oil first stage setting.  The suggested temperature limits given by IEEE Std. C57.91-1995 may be used to set it.  See the application chapter for suggested values.
tTop Oil>1 Set 37 65 10 mins 0 min to 60000 min step 1 min
Top oil second stage setting.  The suggested temperature limits given by IEEE Std. C57.91-1995 (may be used to set it.  See the application chapter for suggested values
Top Oil>2 Set 37 66 80 deg C 1°C to 300°C step 0.1°C
Top oil second stage setting.  The suggested temperature limits given by IEEE Std. C57.91-1995 (may be used to set it.  See the application chapter for suggested values
tTop Oil>2 Set 37 67 10 mins 0 min to 60000 min step 1 min
Top oil second stage time delay setting
Top Oil>3 Set 37 68 90 deg C 1°C to 300°C step 0.1°C
Top oil third stage setting.  The suggested temperature limits given by IEEE Std. C57.91-1995 may be used to set it.  See the application chapter for suggested values
tTop Oil>3 Set 37 69 10 mins 0 min to 60000 min step 1 min
Top oil third stage time delay setting
tPre-trip Set 37 6A 5 mins 0 min to 60000 min step 1 min
After the tpre-trip timer has expired, a pre-trip alarm is given.  This alarm indicates that if the load remains unchanged a thermal trip will be asserted after the stage timer has expired
LOL Status 37 80 Enable Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the loss of life function
Life Hours at HS 37 81 180000 hrs 1 hr to 300000 hrs step 1hr
Life hours at the reference hottest spot temperature.  Advice from the transformer manufacturer may be required
Designed HS temp 37 82 110 deg C 1°C to 200°C step 0.1°C
The designed hottest spot temperature is 110°C for a transformer rated 65°C average winding rise, and 95°C for a transformer rated 55°C average winding rise
Constant B Set 37 83 15000 1 to 100000 step 1
Constant B is associated to the life expectancy curve.  It is based on modern experimental data, and it may be set to 15000 as suggested by IEEE Std. C57.91-1995
FAA> Set 37 84 2 0.1 to 30 step 0.01
Aging acceleration factor setting.  If the aging acceleration factor calculated by the relay is above this setting and tFAA has expired, an FAA alarm would be asserted.  FAA calculation depends on constant B and the hottest temperature calculated by the thermal element
tFAA> Set 37 85 10 mins 0 min to 60000 min step 1 min
Aging acceleration factor timer
LOL>1 Set 37 86 135000 hrs 1 hr to 300000 hrs step 1hr
Transformer loss of life setting.  If the life already lost by the transformer is above this threshold, an LOL alarm would be asserted after tLOL has expired.  LOL calculation depends on the life hours at design hot spot temperature and the calculated residual life
tLOL> Set 37 87 10 mins 0 min to 60000 min step 1 min
Loss of life timer
Reset Life Hours 37 88 0 hr 1 hr to 300000 hrs step 1hr
Resets the LOL status parameter to the set value when the loss of life reset command is executed. For new transformers
Reset Life Hours is zero, so that when the commissioning of the thermal element is over, the loss of life statistics calculations
are reset to zero. For old transformers this setting should indicate how much life the transformer has already lost; therefore, it
should be set to the transformer loss of life

Earth Fault Protection

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1: EARTH FAULT 38 00    
This colunm contains GROUP1 : EARTH FAULT parameters
Earth Fault 1 38 01 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enable or Disable Earth Fault 1
EF 1 Input 38 02 Measured Measured or Derived
Selects measured neutral current or derived neutral current
EF 1 Derived 38 03 T1 HV Winding, LV Winding, TV Winding, T1, T2, T3, T4 or T5
This is available when earth fault is selected to be derived for stage 1  to detemine the derived current source
EF 1 Measured 38 04 TN1 TN1, TN2 or TN3
This is available when earth fault is selected to be measured for stage 1 to determine the measured current source
IN>1 Status 38 05 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>1 Char 38 06 IEC S Inverse DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Tripping characteristic for the first stage earth fault element 1
IN>1 Direction 38 07 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Direction setting for the first stage  earth fault protection 1
IN>1 Current 38 08 0.2*In 24A to 1200A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the first stage earth fault element 1
IN>1 IDG Is 38 09 1.5 1 to 4 step 0.1
Multiple of IN>1 setting for the IDG curve (Scandinavia), determines the actual relay current threshold at which the element starts
IN>1 Time Delay 38 0A 1 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Operating time delay setting for the first stage definite time element
IN>1 TMS 38 0B 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
IN>1 Time Dial 38 0C 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
IN>1 K (RI) 38 0D 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
IN>1 IDG Time 38 0E 1.2 1 to 2 step 0.01
Minimum operating time at high levels of fault current for the IDG curve
IN>1 Reset Char 38 0F DT DT or Inverse
Type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
IN>1 tRESET 38 10 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Reset/release time setting for definite time reset characteristic
IN>2 Status 38 15 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>2 Char 38 16 DT Disabled, DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST  Inverse (TD)
Tripping characteristic for the second stage earth fault protection 1
IN>2 Direction 38 17 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Direction setting for the second stage earth fault protection 1
IN>2 Current 38 18 0.2 24A to 1200A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the second stage earth fault element 1
IN>2 IDG Is 38 19 1.5 1 to 4 step 0.1
Multiple of IN>2 setting for the IDG curve (Scandinavia), determines the actual relay current threshold at which the element starts
IN>2 Time Delay 38 1A 1 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Operating time delay setting for the second stage definite time element
IN>2 TMS 38 1B 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
IN>2 Time Dial 38 1C 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
IN>2 K (RI) 38 1D 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
IN>2 IDG Time 38 1E 1.2 1s to 2s step 0.01s
Minimum operating time at high levels of fault current for the IDG curve
IN>2 Reset Char 38 1F DT DT or Inverse
Type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
IN>2 tRESET 38 20 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Reset/release time setting for definite time reset characteristic
IN>3 Status 38 25 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the third stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>3 Direction 38 26 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Direction setting for the third stage earth fault protection 1
IN>3 Current 38 27 0.5 24A to 9600A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the third stage earth fault element 1
IN>3 Time Delay 38 28 0 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Operating time delay setting for the third stage definite time element
IN>4 Status 38 2C Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the fourth stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>4 Direction 38 2D Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Direction setting for the fourth stage earth fault protection 1
IN>4 Current 38 2E 0.5 24A to 9600A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the fourth stage earth fault element 1
IN>4 Time Delay 38 2F 0 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Operating time delay setting for the fourth stage definite time element
IN> Func Link 38 33 15 4-bit binary setting
Settings that determine whether VT supervision logic signals block selected earth fault stages.  When set to 1, the VTS operation will block the stage if directionalized. When set to 0, the stage will revert to non-directional on the operation of the VTS
IN> DIRECTIONAL 38 34 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
Sub-Heading for IN directional
IN> Char Angle 38 35 -60 -95° to 95° step 1°
Setting for the relay characteristic angle used for the directional decision
IN> Pol 38 36 Zero Sequence Zero sequence or Neg sequence
Setting that determines whether the directional function uses zero sequence or negative sequence voltage polarizing
IN> VNpol Set 38 37 5 0.5V to 80V step 0.5V
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the minimum zero sequence voltage polarizing quantity for directional decision
IN> V2pol Set 38 38 5 0.5V to 80V step 0.5V
Setting for the minimum negative sequence voltage polarizing quantity for directional decision
IN> I2pol Set 38 39 0.08 24A to 300A step 3A
Setting for the minimum negative sequence current polarizing quantity for directional decision
Earth Fault 2 38 41 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enable or Disable Earth Fault 2
EF 2 Input 38 42 Measured Measured or Derived
Selects measured neutral current or derived neutral current
EF 2 Derived 38 43 P642: T2 P643: T3 P645: T5 HV Winding, LV Winding, TV Winding, T1, T2, T3, T4 or T5
The setting is avaliable when earth fault input is derived to select the derived neural current source
EF 2 Measured 38 44 TN2 TN1, TN2 or TN3
The setting is avaliable when earth fault input is measured to select the measured neural curernt source
IN>1 Status 38 45 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>1 Char 38 46 IEC S Inverse DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Tripping characteristic for the first stage earth fault protection 2
IN>1 Direction 38 47 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Direction setting for the first stage earth fault protection 2
IN>1 Current 38 48 0.2*In 24A to 1200A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the first stage earth fault element 2
IN>1 IDG Is 38 49 1.5 1 to 4 step 0.1
Multiple of IN>1 setting for the IDG curve (Scandinavia), determines the actual relay current threshold at which the element starts
IN>1 Time Delay 38 4A 1 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Operating time delay setting for the first stage definite time element
IN>1 TMS 38 4B 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
IN>1 Time Dial 38 4C 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
IN>1 K (RI) 38 4D 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
IN>1 IDG Time 38 4E 1.2 1s to 2s step 0.01s
Minimum operating time at high levels of fault current for the IDG curve
IN>1 Reset Char 38 4F DT DT or Inverse
Type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
IN>1 tRESET 38 50 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Reset/release time setting for definite time reset characteristic
IN>2 Status 38 55 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>2 Char 38 56 DT DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
Tripping characteristic for the second stage earth fault protection 2
IN>2 Direction 38 57 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Direction setting for the second stage  earth fault protection 2
IN>2 Current 38 58 0.2 24A to 1200A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the second stage earth fault element 2
IN>2 IDG Is 38 59 1.5 1 to 4 step 0.1
Multiple of IN>2 setting for the IDG curve (Scandinavia), determines the actual relay current threshold at which the element starts
IN>2 Time Delay 38 5A 1 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Operating time delay setting for the second stage definite time element
IN>2 TMS 38 5B 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
IN>2 Time Dial 38 5C 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
IN>2 K (RI) 38 5D 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
Time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
IN>2 IDG Time 38 5E 1.2 1s to 2s step 0.01s
Minimum operating time at high levels of fault current for the IDG curve
IN>2 Reset Char 38 5F DT DT or Inverse
Type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
IN>2 tRESET 38 60 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Reset/release time setting for definite time reset characteristic
IN>3 Status 38 65 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the third stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>3 Direction 38 66 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Direction setting for the third stage earth fault protection 2
IN>3 Current 38 67 0.5 24A to 9600A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the third stage earth fault element 2
IN>3 Time Delay 38 68 0 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Operating time delay setting for the third stage definite time element
IN>4 Status 38 6C Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the fourth stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>4 Direction 38 6D Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
Direction setting for the fourth stage earth fault protection 2
IN>4 Current 38 6E 0.5 24A to 9600A step 3A
Pick-up setting for the fourth stage earth fault element 2
IN>4 Time Delay 38 6F 0 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Operating time delay setting for the fourth stage definite time element
IN> Func Link 38 73 15 4-bit binary setting
Settings that determine whether VT supervision logic signals block selected earth fault stages.  When set to 1, the VTS operation will block the stage if directionalized. When set to 0, the stage will revert to non-directional on the operation of the VTS
IN> DIRECTIONAL 38 74 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
Sub-Heading for IN directional
IN> Char Angle 38 75 -60 -95° to 95° step 1°
Setting for the relay characteristic angle used for the directional decision
IN> Pol 38 76 Zero Sequence Zero sequence or Neg sequence
Setting that determines whether the directional function uses zero sequence or negative sequence voltage polarizing
IN> VNpol Set 38 77 5 0.5V to 80V step 0.5V
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the minimum zero sequence voltage polarizing quantity for directional decision
IN> V2pol Set 38 78 5 0.5V to 25V step 0.5V
Setting for the minimum negative sequence voltage polarizing quantity for directional decision
IN> I2pol Set 38 79 0.08 24A to 300A step 3A
Setting for the minimum negative sequence current polarizing quantity for directional Decision
Earth Fault 3 38 81 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only. Earth Fault 3
EF 3 Input 38 82 Measured Measured or Derived
P643 and P645 only.
Selects measured neutral current or derived neutral current
EF 3 Derived 38 83 P643: T2 P645: T3 HV Winding, LV Winding, TV Winding, T1, T2, T3, T4 or T5
P643 and P645 only.
EF 3 Measured 38 84 TN3 TN1, TN2 or TN3
P643 and P645 only.
IN>1 Status 38 85 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to enable or disable the first stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>1 Char 38 86 IEC S Inverse DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
P643 and P645 only.
Tripping characteristic for the first stage earth fault protection
IN>1 Direction 38 87 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
Direction setting for the first stage earth fault protection 3
IN>1 Current 38 88 0.2*In 24A to 1200A step 3A
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the first stage earth fault element 3
IN>1 IDG Is 38 89 1.5 1 to 4 step 0.1
P643 and P645 only.
Multiple of IN>1 setting for the IDG curve (Scandinavia), determines the actual relay current threshold at which the element starts
IN>1 Time Delay 38 8A 1 0s to 200s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay setting for the first stage definite time element
IN>1 TMS 38 8B 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
P643 and P645 only.
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
IN>1 Time Dial 38 8C 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
P643 and P645 only.
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
IN>1 K (RI) 38 8D 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
P643 and P645 only.
Time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
IN>1 IDG Time 38 8E 1.2 1s to 2s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Minimum operating time at high levels of fault current for the IDG curve
IN>1 Reset Char 38 8F DT DT or Inverse
P643 and P645 only.
Type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
IN>1 tRESET 38 90 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Reset/release time setting for definite time reset characteristic
IN>2 Status 38 95 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
d P645 only.
e or disable the second stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>2 Char 38 96 DT DT (DT), IEC S Inverse (TMS), IEC V Inverse (TMS), IEC E Inverse (TMS), UK LT Inverse (TMS), Rectifier (TMS), RI (K), IEEE M Inverse (TD), IEEE V Inverse (TD), IEEE E Inverse (TD), US Inverse (TD) or US ST Inverse (TD) 
P643 and P645 only.
Tripping characteristic for the second stage earth fault protection
IN>2 Direction 38 97 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
Direction setting for the second stage  earth fault protection 2
IN>2 Current 38 98 0.2 24A to 1200A step 3A
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the second stage earth fault element 2
IN>2 IDG Is 38 99 1.5 1 to 4 step 0.1
P643 and P645 only.
Multiple of IN>2 setting for the IDG curve (Scandinavia), determines the actual relay current threshold at which the element starts
IN>2 Time Delay 38 9A 1 0s to 200s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay setting for the second stage definite time element
IN>2 TMS 38 9B 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
P643 and P645 only.
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
IN>2 Time Dial 38 9C 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
P643 and P645 only.
Time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves
IN>2 K (RI) 38 9D 1 0.1 to 10 step 0.05
P643 and P645 only.
Time multiplier to adjust the operating time for the RI curve
IN>2 IDG Time 38 9E 1.2 1s to 2s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Minimum operating time at high levels of fault current for the IDG curve
IN>2 Reset Char 38 9F DT DT or Inverse
P643 and P645 only.
Type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves
IN>2 tRESET 38 A0 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Reset/release time setting for definite time reset characteristic
IN>3 Status 38 A5 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to enable or disable the third stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>3 Direction 38 A6 Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
Direction setting for the third stage  earth fault protection 3
IN>3 Current 38 A7 0.5 24A to 9600A step 3A
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the third stage earth fault element 3
IN>3 Time Delay 38 A8 0 0s to 200s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay setting for the third stage definite time element
IN>4 Status 38 AC Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to enable or disable the fourth stage definite time element. If the function is disabled, all associated settings with the exception of this setting, are hidden
IN>4 Direction 38 AD Non-Directional Non-directional, Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
P643 and P645 only.
Direction setting for the fourth stage TV winding earth fault protection
IN>4 Current 38 AE 0.5 24A to 9600A step 3A
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the fourth stage earth fault element on the TV winding
IN>4 Time Delay 38 AF 0 0s to 200s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay setting for the fourth stage definite time element
IN> Func Link 38 B3 15 4-bit binary setting
P643 and P645 only.
Settings that determine whether VT supervision logic signals block selected earth fault stages.  When set to 1, the VTS operation will block the stage if directionalized. When set to 0, the stage will revert to non-directional on the o
IN> DIRECTIONAL 38 B4 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
P643 and P645 only.
IN> Char Angle 38 B5 -60 -95° to 95° step 1°
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the relay characteristic angle used for the directional decision
IN> Pol 38 B6 Zero Sequence Zero sequence or Neg sequence
P643 and P645 only.
Setting that determines whether the directional function uses zero sequence or negative sequence voltage polarizing
IN> VNpol Set 38 B7 5 0.5V to 80V step 0.5V
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the minimum zero sequence voltage polarizing quantity for directional decision
IN> V2pol Set 38 B8 5 0.5V to 25V step 0.5V
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the minimum negative sequence voltage polarizing quantity for directional decision
IN> I2pol Set 38 B9 0.08 24A to 300A step 3A
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the minimum negative sequence current polarizing quantity for directional decision

Through Fault (TF) Monitoring Protection

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1:
TF MONITORING
39 00    
This column contains GROUP1: THROUGH FAULT parameters
Through Fault 39 01 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables monitoring of through faults
Monitored Input 39 02 HV HV, LV, TV or Biased Current
Selects the input winding to be monitored
TF I> Trigger 39 03 3.85pu 0.08pu to 20pu step 0.01pu
A through fault event is recorded if any of the phase currents is larger than this setting
TF I2t> Alarm 39 04 100 pu 0 to 1600pu step 0.1pu
An alarm is asserted if the maximum cumulative I2t in the three phases exceeds this setting

Residual Overvoltage (Neutral Voltage Displacement)

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1: RESIDUAL O/V NVD 3B 00    
P643 and P645 only.
This column contains GROUP 1: RESIDUAL O/V NVD parameters
VN>1 Function 3B 14 DT Disabled, DT or IDMT
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the tripping characteristic of the first stage residual overvoltage element
VN>1 Voltage Set 3B 16 5*V1 1*V1 to 80*V1 step 1*V1
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the first stage residual overvoltage characteristic
VN>1 Time Delay 3B 18 5s 0 to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay setting for the first stage definite time residual overvoltage element
VN>1 TMS 3B 1A 1 0.5 to 100 step 0.5
P643 and P645 only.
TMS to adjust the operating time of the IDMT characteristic. The characteristic is defined as follows: t = K / ( M – 1)
where: K = TMS
t = Operating time in seconds
M = Derived residual voltage/relay setting voltage (VN> Voltage Set)
VN>1 tReset 3B 1C 0s 0 to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to determine the reset or release definite time for the first stage characteristic
VN>2 Status 3B 20 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Setting to enable or disable the second stage definite time residual overvoltage element
VN>2 Voltage Set 3B 26 10*V1 1*V1 to 80*V1 step 1*V1
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the second stage residual overvoltage element
VN>2 Time Delay 3B 28 10s 0 to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay for the second stage residual overvoltage element

Overfluxing

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1: OVERFLUXING 3D 00    
This column contains GROUP 1: OVERFLUXING parameters
Volts/Hz W1 3D 01 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
Volts/Hz Overfluxing element W1.
P643 and P645 only if the optional three-phase VT is available.
V/HZ Alm Status 3D 02 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables the V/Hz alarm element
V/HZ Alm Set 3D 03 2.31 V/HZ 1.5V/Hz to 3.5V/Hz step 0.01V/Hz
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the V/Hz element
V/Hz Alarm Delay 3D 04 10s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay setting of the V/Hz alarm element
V/Hz>1 Status 3D 10 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables the V/Hz first stage trip element
V/Hz>1 Function 3D 13 DT DT or IDMT
P643 and P645 only.
Tripping characteristic setting of the V/Hz first stage trip element
V/Hz>1 Trip Set 3D 16 2.42 V/HZ 1.5V/Hz to 3.5V/Hz step 0.01V/Hz
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the V/Hz first stage trip element
V/Hz>1 Trip TMS 3D 19 0.1 0.01 to 12 step 0.01
P643 and P645 only.
Setting for the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) to adjust the operating time of the IDMT characteristic
V/Hz>1 Delay 3D 1A 60s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time-delay setting of the V/Hz first stage trip element
V/Hz>1 tReset 3D 1B 60s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
P643 and P645 only.
Reset function so the user can reset overfluxing after injection testing
V/Hz>2 Status 3D 20 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables the V/Hz second stage trip element
V/Hz>2 Trip Set 3D 25 2.64 V/HZ 1.5V/Hz to 3.5V/Hz step 0.01V/Hz
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the V/Hz second stage trip element
V/Hz>2 Delay 3D 2A 3s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay setting of the V/Hz alarm element
V/Hz>3 Status 3D 30 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables the V/Hz third stage trip element
V/Hz>3 Trip Set 3D 35 2.86 V/HZ 1.5V/Hz to 3.5V/Hz step 0.01V/Hz
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the V/Hz third stage trip element
V/Hz>3 Delay 3D 3A 2.00s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay setting of the V/Hz alarm element
V/Hz>4 Status 3D 40 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables the V/Hz fourth stage trip element
V/Hz>4 Trip Set 3D 45 3.08 V/HZ 1.5V/Hz to 3.5V/Hz step 0.01V/Hz
P643 and P645 only.
Pick-up setting for the V/Hz fourth stage trip element
V/Hz>4 Delay 3D 4A 1.00s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
P643 and P645 only.
Operating time delay setting of the V/Hz alarm element
TPre-trip Alarm 3D 4F 200s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
P643 and P645 only. Pre-trip alarm time delay
Volts/Hz W2 3D 50    
Volts/Hz Overfluxing element W2.
V/HZ Alm Status 3D 51 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the V/Hz alarm element
V/HZ Alm Set 3D 52 2.31 V/HZ 1.5V/Hz to 3.5V/Hz step 0.01V/Hz
Pick-up setting for the V/Hz element
V/Hz Alarm Delay 3D 53 10s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
Operating time delay setting of the V/Hz alarm element
V/Hz>1 Status 3D 60 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the V/Hz first stage trip element
V/Hz>1 Function 3D 63 DT DT or IDMT
Tripping characteristic setting of the V/Hz first stage trip element
V/Hz>1 Trip Set 3D 66 2.42 V/HZ 1.5V/Hz to 3.5V/Hz step 0.01V/Hz
Pick-up setting for the V/Hz first stage trip element
V/Hz>1 Trip TMS 3D 69 0.1 s 0.01 to 12 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IDMT characteristic.
V/Hz>1 Delay 3D 6A 60s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
Operating time delay setting of the V/Hz alarm element
V/Hz>1 tReset 3D 6B 0s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
Reset function so the user can reset overfluxing after injection testing
V/Hz>2 Status 3D 70 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the V/Hz second stage trip element
V/Hz>2 Trip Set 3D 75 2.64 V/HZ 1.5V/Hz to 3.5V/Hz step 0.01V/Hz
Pick-up setting for the V/Hz second stage trip element
V/Hz>2 Delay 3D 7A 3s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
Operating time delay setting of the V/Hz alarm element
V/Hz>3 Status 3D 80 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the V/Hz third stage trip element
V/Hz>3 Trip Set 3D 85 2.86 V/HZ 1.5V/Hz to 3.5V/Hz step 0.01V/Hz
Pick-up setting for the V/Hz third stage trip element
V/Hz>3 Delay 3D 8A 2.00s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
Operating time delay setting of the V/Hz alarm element
V/Hz>4 Status 3D 90 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the V/Hz fourth stage trip element
V/Hz>4 Trip Set 3D 95 3.08 V/HZ 1.5V/Hz to 3.5V/Hz step 0.01V/Hz
Pick-up setting for the V/Hz fourth stage trip element
V/Hz>4 Delay 3D 9A 1.00s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
Operating time delay setting of the V/Hz alarm element
TPre-trip alarm 3D 9F 200s 0s to 6000s step 0.1s
Pre-trip alarm time delay

Voltage Protection

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1:
VOLT PROTECTION
42 00    
This column contains GROUP 1: VOLT PROTECTION parameters
UNDER VOLTAGE 42 01 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
P643 and P645 only. UNDER VOLTAGE
V< Measur’t Mode 42 02 Phase-Neutral Phase-Phase or Phase-Neutral
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the measured input voltage used for the undervoltage elements
V< Operate Mode 42 03 Any Phase Any-Phase or Three-phase
P643 and P645 only.
Determines whether any phase or all three phases must satisfy the undervoltage criteria before a decision is made
V<1 Function 42 04 DT IDMT or DT or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Tripping characteristic for the first stage undervoltage function. The characteristic is defined by: t =  K / (1 – M)
Where:
K = TMS
t  = Operating time in seconds
M =  Measured voltage/relay setting voltage (V< Voltage Set)
V<1 Voltage Set 42 05 50V 10V to 120V step 1V
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the pick-up setting for the first stage undervoltage element
V<1 Time Delay 42 06 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the operating time-delay for the first stage definite time undervoltage element
V<1 TMS 42 07 1 0.05 to 100 step 0.05
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
V<1 Poledead Inh 42 08 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
If the setting is enabled, the relevant stage is inhibited by the pole dead logic.  This logic produces an output when it detects either an open circuit breaker through auxiliary contacts feeding the relay opto inputs, or it detects a combination of both undercurrent and undervoltage on any one phase.  It allows the undervoltage protection to reset when the circuit breaker opens to cater for line or bus side VT applications.
V<2 Status 42 09 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables the second stage undervoltage element
V<2 Voltage Set 42 0A 38V 10V to 120V step 1V
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the pick-up setting for the second stage undervoltage element
V<2 Time Delay 42 0B 5s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the operating time-delay for the second stage definite time undervoltage element
V<2 Poledead Inh 42 0C Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
This works in the same way as V<1 Poledead Inh but for V<2 Poledead Inh instead.
OVERVOLTAGE 42 20 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
P643 and P645 only. OVERVOLTAGE
V> Measur’t Mode 42 21 Phase-Phase Phase-Phase or Phase-Neutral
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the measured input voltage used for the overvoltage elements
V> Operate Mode 42 22 Any Phase Any-Phase or Three-phase
P643 and P645 only.
Determines whether any phase or all three phases must satisfy the overvoltage criteria before a decision is made
V>1 Function 42 23 DT IDMT or DT or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Tripping characteristic for the first stage overvoltage function. The characteristic is defined by:
t = K / (M – 1)
Where:
K = TMS
t = Operating time in seconds
M = Measured voltage/relay setting voltage (V<> Voltage Set)
V>1 Voltage Set 42 24 130V 60V to 185V step 1V
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the pick-up setting for the first stage overvoltage element
V>1 Time Delay 42 25 10s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the operating time-delay for the first stage definite time overvoltage element
V>1 TMS 42 26 1 0.05 to 100 step 0.05
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the time multiplier to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic
V>2 Status 42 27 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
Enables or disables the second stage overvoltage element
V>2 Voltage Set 42 28 150V 60V to 185V step 1V
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the pick-up setting for the second stage overvoltage element
V>2 Time Delay 42 29 0.5 0s to 100s step 0.01s
P643 and P645 only.
Sets the operating time-delay for the second stage definite time overvoltage element
NPS O/V 42 40 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
Negative phase sequence over voltage
V2> Status 42 41 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enable  or disable the NPS OV
V2> Voltage Set 42 42 15V 1V to 110V step 1V
Set up the pick up setting for Negative phase sequence over voltage
V2> Time Delay 42 43 5s 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Set the operating time delay  for the definite time stage

Frequency Protection

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1:
FREQ PROTECTION
43 00    
This column contains GROUP 1: FREQ PROTECTION parameters
UNDER FREQUENCY 43 01 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
UNDER FREQUENCY
F<1 Status 43 02 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the first stage underfrequency element
F<1 Setting 43 03 49.5Hz 46Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Determines the pick-up threshold for the first stage underfrequency element
F<1 Time Delay 43 04 4s 0s to 600s step 0.01s
Determines the minimum operating time-delay for the first stage underfrequency element
F<2 Status 43 05 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the second stage underfrequency element
F<2 Setting 43 06 49Hz 46Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Determines the pick-up threshold for the second stage underfrequency element
F<2 Time Delay 43 07 3s 0s to 600s step 0.01s
Determines the minimum operating time-delay for the second stage underfrequency element
F<3 Status 43 08 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the third stage underfrequency element
F<3 Setting 43 09 48.5Hz 46Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Determines the pick-up threshold for the third stage underfrequency element
F<3 Time Delay 43 0A 2s 0s to 600s step 0.01s
Determines the minimum operating time-delay for the third stage underfrequency element
F<4 Status 43 0B Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Determines the pick-up threshold for the fourth stage underfrequency element
F<4 Setting 43 0C 48Hz 46Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Enables or disables the fourth stage underfrequency element
F<4 Time Delay 43 0D 1s 0s to 600s step 0.01s
Determines the minimum operating time-delay for the fourth stage underfrequency element
OVER FREQUENCY 43 0F Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
OVER FREQUENCY
F>1 Status 43 10 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the first stage overfrequency element
F>1 Setting 43 11 50.5Hz 46Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Determines the pick-up threshold for the first stage overfrequency element
F>1 Time Delay 43 12 2s 0s to 600s step 0.01s
Determines the minimum operating time-delay for the first stage overfrequency element
F>2 Status 43 13 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the second stage overfrequency element
F>2 Setting 43 14 51Hz 46Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Determines the pick-up threshold for the second stage overfrequency element
F>2 Time Delay 43 15 1s 0s to 600s step 0.01s
Determines the minimum operating time-delay for the second stage overfrequency element

Resistor Temperature Device (RTD) Protection

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1:
RTD PROT        ON
44 00    
This column contains GROUP 1: RTD PROTECTION parameters
Select RTD 44 01 0 10-bit binary setting:
Bit 0 – Select RTD 1, Bit 1 – Select RTD 2, Bit 2 – Select RTD 3 through to Bit 9 – Select RTD 10
10-bit setting to enable or disable the 10 RTDs. For each bit 1 = Enabled, 0 = Disabled
RTD1 PROTECTION 44 02 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
RTD1 PROTECTION
RTD Alarm Set 44 03 80°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
Temperature setting for the RTD 1 alarm element
RTD Alarm Dly 44 04 10 s 0s to 100s step 1s
Operating time delay setting for the RTD 1 alarm element
RTD Trip Set 44 05 85°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
Operating time delay setting for the RTD 1 alarm element
RTD Trip Dly 44 06 1 s 0s to 100s step 1s
Operating time delay setting for the RTD 1 alarm element
RTD2 PROTECTION 44 07 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
RTD2 PROTECTION
RTD Alarm Set 44 08 80°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Alarm Dly 44 09 10 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Set 44 0A 85°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Dly 44 0B 1 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD3 PROTECTION 44 0C Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
RTD3 PROTECTION
RTD Alarm Set 44 0D 80°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Alarm Dly 44 0E 10 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Set 44 0F 85°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Dly 44 10 1 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD4 PROTECTION 44 11 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
RTD4 PROTECTION
RTD Alarm Set 44 12 80°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Alarm Dly 44 13 10 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Set 44 14 85°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Dly 44 15 1 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD5 PROTECTION 44 16 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
RTD5 PROTECTION
RTD Alarm Set 44 17 80°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Alarm Dly 44 18 10 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Set 44 19 85°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Dly 44 1A 1 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD6 PROTECTION 44 1B Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
RTD6 PROTECTION
RTD Alarm Set 44 1C 80°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Alarm Dly 44 1D 10 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Set 44 1E 85°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Dly 44 1F 1 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD7 PROTECTION 44 20 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
RTD7 PROTECTION
RTD Alarm Set 44 21 80°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Alarm Dly 44 22 10 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Set 44 23 85°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Dly 44 24 1 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD8 PROTECTION 44 25 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
RTD8 PROTECTION
RTD Alarm Set 44 26 80°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Alarm Dly 44 27 10 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Set 44 28 85°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Dly 44 29 1 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD9 PROTECTION 44 2A Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
RTD9 PROTECTION
RTD Alarm Set 44 2B 80°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Alarm Dly 44 2C 10 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Set 44 2D 85°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Dly 44 2E 1 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD 10 PROTECTION 44 2F Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
RTD 10 PROTECTION
RTD Alarm Set 44 30 80°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Alarm Dly 44 31 10 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Set 44 32 85°C 0° to 200°C step 1°C
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead
RTD Trip Dly 44 33 1 s 0s to 100s step 1s
This setting works in the same way as the RTD 1 alarm element, but for RTD 2 instead

Circuit Breaker (CB) Failure

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1: CB FAIL 45 00    
GROUP 1: CB FAIL
T1 CBF 45 01 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
BREAKER FAIL for CT1
I< Current Set 45 02 0.1 5% to 400% step 1%
Set the CT1 under current setting
IN< Status 45 03 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enable or Disabel the IN<
IN< Input 45 04 Measured Measured or Derived
Set the IN input, derived or measured
IN< Terminal 45 05 TN1 TN1, TN2 or TN3
If for IN is measured, set the measured netrual current source
IN< Current Set 45 06 0.1 5% to 400% step 1%
Set IN under current setting
CB Fail 1 Status 45 07 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the first stage of the circuit breaker function
CB Fail 1 Timer 45 08 0.05s 0s to 10s step 0.001s
Circuit breaker fail timer setting for stage 1, for which the initiating condition must be valid
CB Fail 2 Status 45 09 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the second stage of the circuit breaker function
CB Fail 2 Timer 45 0A 0.2s 0s to 10s step 0.001s
Circuit breaker fail timer setting for stage 2, for which the initiating condition must be valid
CBF Non I Reset 45 0C CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I< or Prot Reset & I
Setting which determines the elements that reset the circuit breaker fail time for non current-based protection functions (such as voltage and frequency) initiating circuit breaker fail conditions
CBF Ext Reset 45 0D CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I< or Prot Reset & I
Setting which determines the elements that reset the circuit breaker fail time for external protection functions initiating circuit breaker fail conditions
T2 CBF 45 11 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
 
I< Current Set 45 12 0.1 5% to 400% step 1%
 
IN< Status 45 13 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
 
IN< Input 45 14 Measured Measured or Derived
 
IN< Terminal 45 15 TN1 TN1, TN2 or TN3
 
IN< Current Set 45 16 0.1 5% to 400% step 1%
 
CB Fail 1 Status 45 17 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
 
CB Fail 1 Timer 45 18 0.05s 0s to 10s step 0.001s
 
CB Fail 2 Status 45 19 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
 
CB Fail 2 Timer 45 1A 0.2s 0s to 10s step 0.001s
 
CBF Non I Reset 45 1C CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I< or Prot Reset & I
 
CBF Ext Reset 45 1D CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I< or Prot Reset & I
 
T3 CBF 45 21 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
I< Current Set 45 22 0.1 5% to 400% step 1%
P643 and P645 only.
IN< Status 45 23 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
IN< Input 45 24 Measured Measured or Derived
P643 and P645 only.
IN< Terminal 45 25 TN1 TN1, TN2 or TN3
P643 and P645 only.
IN< Current Set 45 26 0.1 5% to 400% step 1%
P643 and P645 only.
CB Fail 1 Status 45 27 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
CB Fail 1 Timer 45 28 0.05s 0s to 10s step 0.001s
P643 and P645 only.
CB Fail 2 Status 45 29 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P643 and P645 only.
CB Fail 2 Timer 45 2A 0.2s 0s to 10s step 0.001s
P643 and P645 only.
CBF Non I Reset 45 2C CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I< or Prot Reset & I
P643 and P645 only.
CBF Ext Reset 45 2D CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I< or Prot Reset & I
P643 and P645 only.
T4 CBF 45 31 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P645 only.
I< Current Set 45 32 0.1 5% to 400% step 1%
P645 only.
IN< Status 45 33 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P645 only.
IN< Input 45 34 Measured Measured or Derived
P645 only.
IN< Terminal 45 35 TN1 TN1, TN2 or TN3
P645 only.
IN< Current Set 45 36 0.1 5% to 400% step 1%
P645 only.
CB Fail 1 Status 45 37 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P645 only.
CB Fail 1 Timer 45 38 0.05s 0s to 10s step 0.001s
P645 only.
CB Fail 2 Status 45 39 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P645 only.
CB Fail 2 Timer 45 3A 0.2s 0s to 10s step 0.001s
P645 only.
CBF Non I Reset 45 3C CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I< or Prot Reset & I
P645 only.
CBF Ext Reset 45 3D CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I< or Prot Reset & I
P645 only.
T5 CBF 45 41 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P645 only.
I< Current Set 45 42 0.1 5% to 400% step 1%
P645 only.
IN< Status 45 43 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P645 only.
IN< Input 45 44 Measured Measured or Derived
P645 only.
IN< Terminal 45 45 TN1 TN1, TN2 or TN3
P645 only.
IN< Current Set 45 46 0.1 5% to 400% step 1%
P645 only.
CB Fail 1 Status 45 47 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
P645 only.
CB Fail 1 Timer 45 48 0.05s 0s to 10s step 0.001s
P645 only.
CB Fail 2 Status 45 49 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
P645 only.
CB Fail 2 Timer 45 4A 0.2s 0s to 10s step 0.001s
P645 only.
CBF Non I Reset 45 4C CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I< or Prot Reset & I
P645 only.
CBF Ext Reset 45 4D CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I< or Prot Reset & I
P645 only.

VT and CT Supervision

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1: SUPERVIS 46 00    
This column contains GROUP 1: SUPERVISION parameters
VT SUPERVISION 46 01 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
VT Supervision does not apply to P642 when the optional three-phase VT input is available. Only visible if Main VT is fitted or P642 model with 2 VT inputs.
VTS Status 46 02 Indication Blocking or Indication or Disabled
Determines whether on detection of VTS.
• VTS logic is Disabled.
• VTS alarm is Indication only.
• Voltage-dependent protection elements are Blocked. Optional conversion of directional overcurrent to non-directional protection (blocking mode only).
VTS Reset Mode 46 03 Manual Manual or Auto
VTS block is latched after user-settable VTS Time Delay. Once latched, the reset methods are: Manual using the front panel interface (or remote communications).
Auto provided VTS condition has been removed and 3-phase voltages have been restored above ph
VTS Time Delay 46 04 5s 1s to 10s step 0.1s
Operating time delay setting of the VTS element on detection of a voltage supervision condition.
VTS I> Inhibit 46 05 10 0.08pu to 32pu step 0.01pu
The overcurrent setting inhibits VT supervision if all 3-phase voltages are lost, due to a close-up 3-phase fault after CB is closed.
In P643, CT1/CT2/CT3 if the VT is in the HV, TV or LV. In P645, CT1/CT3/CT5 if the VT is in HV, TV or LV.
VTS I2> Inhibit 46 06 0.05 0.05pu to 0.5pu step 0.01pu
NPS overcurrent setting inhibits VT supervision if a fault occurs with excess negative sequence current. In P643, always referred to CT1/CT2/CT3 if the VT is in the HV, TV or LV.
In P645, always referred to CT1/CT3/CT5 if the VT is in HV, TV or LV.
CT SUPERVISION 46 20 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
CT Supervision applies to P642, P643, P645 and P746 when the optional CT input is available.
Diff CTS 46 21 Enable Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the CTS function
CTS Status 46 22 Restrain Indication or Restrain
In Indication mode, the CTS alarm  is issued without delay when a CT failure is detected.  In restrain mode, the differential protection is desensitised to the Is-CTS setting
CTS Tdelay 46 23 2s 0s to 10s step 0.1s
Determines the operating time delay of the element on detection of a current transformer supervision condition
CTS I1 46 24 0.1 5% to 100% step 1%
Set release threshold
CTS I2/I1>1 46 25 0.05 5% to 100% step 1%
Low set ratio of negative to positive sequence current
CTS I2/I1>2 46 26 0.4 5% to 100% step 1%
High set ratio of negative to positive sequence current

Input Labels

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1: INPUT LABELS 4A 00    
This column contains GROUP 1: INPUT LABELS parameters
Opto Input 1 4A 01 Input L1 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 2 4A 02 Input L2 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 3 4A 03 Input L3 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 4 4A 04 Input L4 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 5 4A 05 Input L5 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 6 4A 06 Input L6 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 7 4A 07 Input L7 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 8 4A 08 Input L8 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 9 4A 09 Input L9 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 10 4A 0A Input L10 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 11 4A 0B Input L11 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 12 4A 0C Input L12 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 13 4A 0D Input L13 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 14 4A 0E Input L14 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 15 4A 0F Input L15 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 16 4A 10 Input L16 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 17 4A 11 Input L17 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 18 4A 12 Input L18 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 19 4A 13 Input L19 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 20 4A 14 Input L20 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 21 4A 15 Input L21 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 22 4A 16 Input L22 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 23 4A 17 Input L23 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 24 4A 18 Input L24 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 25 4A 19 Input L25 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 26 4A 1A Input L26 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 27 4A 1B Input L27 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 28 4A 1C Input L28 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 29 4A 1D Input L29 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 30 4A 1E Input L30 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 31 4A 1F Input L31 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input
Opto Input 32 4A 20 Input L32 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual opto input

Output Labels

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1: OUTPUT LABELS 4B 00    
This column contains GROUP 1: OUTPUT LABELS parameters
Relay 1 4B 01 Output R1 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P642, P643, P645 and P746.
Text label to describe each individual relay output contact. This text is displayed in the programmable scheme logic and event
record description of the relay output contact
Relay 2 4B 02 Output R2 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as Relay 1.
Relay 3 4B 03 Output R3 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as Relay 1.
Relay 4 4B 04 Output R4 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as Relay 1.
Relay 5 4B 05 Output R5 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as Relay 1.
Relay 6 4B 06 Output R6 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as Relay 1.
Relay 7 4B 07 Output R7 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as Relay 1.
Relay 8 4B 08 Output R8 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as Relay 1.
Relay 9 4B 09 Output R9 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as Relay 1.
Relay 10 4B 0A Output R10 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as Relay 1.
Relay 11 4B 0B Output R11 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as Relay 1.
Relay 12 4B 0C Output R12 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as Relay 1.
Relay 13 4B 0D Output R13 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
Text label to describe each individual relay output contact. This text is displayed in the programmable scheme logic and event record description of the relay output contact
Relay 14 4B 0E Output R14 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 12.
Relay 15 4B 0F Output R15 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 12.
Relay 16 4B 10 Output R16 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 12.
Relay 17 4B 11 Output R17 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 12.
Relay 18 4B 12 Output R18 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 12.
Relay 19 4B 13 Output R19 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 12.
Relay 20 4B 14 Output R20 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 12.
Relay 21 4B 15 Output R21 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 12.
Relay 22 4B 16 Output R22 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 12.
Relay 23 4B 17 Output R23 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 12.
Relay 24 4B 18 Output R24 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P643, P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 12.
Relay 25 4B 19 Output R25 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P645 and P746 only.
Text label to describe each individual relay output contact. This text is displayed in the programmable scheme logic and event record description of the relay output contact
Relay 26 4B 1A Output R26 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 19.
Relay 27 4B 1B Output R27 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 19.
Relay 28 4B 1C Output R28 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 19.
Relay 29 4B 1D Output R29 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 19.
Relay 30 4B 1E Output R30 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 19.
Relay 31 4B 1F Output R31 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 19.
Relay 32 4B 20 Output R32 Not Used 16-character text string (32 to 163)
P645 and P746 only.
This works in the same way as Relay 19.

RTD Labels

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1: RTD LABE 4C 00    
This column contains GROUP 1: RTD LABELS parameters
RTD 1 4C 01 RTD 1 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Text label to describe each individual RTD.  This text is displayed in the Measurements 3 menu and fault records for the description of the RTDs.
RTD 2 4C 02 RTD 2 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as RTD 1.
RTD 3 4C 03 RTD 3 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as RTD 1.
RTD 4 4C 04 RTD 4 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as RTD 1.
RTD 5 4C 05 RTD 5 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as RTD 1.
RTD 6 4C 06 RTD 6 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as RTD 1.
RTD 7 4C 07 RTD 7 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as RTD 1.
RTD 8 4C 08 RTD 8 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as RTD 1.
RTD 9 4C 09 RTD 9 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as RTD 1.
RTD 10 4C 0A RTD 10 16-character text string (32 to 163)
This works in the same way as RTD 1.

Current Loop Inputs and Outputs (CLIO) Protection

Menu Text Row Col Default Setting Available Setting
Description
GROUP 1:
CLIO PROTECTION
4D 00    
This column contains GROUP 1: CLIO PROTECTION parameters
CLI1 PROTECTION 4D 01 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
CLI1 PROTECTION
CLI Input Status 4D 02 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop (transducer) input 1 element
CLI Input Type 4D 04 4-20mA 0 to 1mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA
Current loop 1 input type
CLI Input Label 4D 06 CLIO Input 1 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Current loop 1 input description.  The minimum and maximum settings define the range but they have no units.  The user can use the label to enter the transducer function and unit of measurement
CLI Minimum 4D 08 0 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
Current loop input 1 minimum setting.  Defines the lower range of the physical or electrical quantity measured by the transducer
CLI Maximum 4D 0A 100 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
Current loop input 1 maximum setting.  Defines the upper range of the physical or electrical quantity measured by the transducer
CLI Alarm 4D 0C Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Fn 4D 0E Over Over or Under
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Set 4D 10 50 From "MIN(CLI1Min, Max)" to "MAX(CLI1Min, Max))" step 0.1
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Delay 4D 12 1 0s to 100s step 0.1s
Operating time-delay setting of current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Trip 4D 14 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI Trip Fn 4D 16 Over Over or Under
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Trip Set 4D 18 60 LI1Min, Max)" to "MAX(CLI1Min, tep 0.1
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI Trip Delay 4D 1A 0 0s to 100s step 0.1s
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI I< Alarm 4D 1C Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop input 1 undercurrent element used to supervise the 4-20 mA input only
CLI I< Alm Set 4D 1E 0.0035 0mA to 4mA step 0.1mA
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 undercurrent element. (4 – 20 mA input only)
CLI2 PROTECTION 4D 21 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
CLI2 PROTECTION
CLI Input Status 4D 22 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop (transducer) input 1 element
CLI Input Type 4D 24 4-20mA 0 to 1mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA
Current loop 1 input type
CLI Input Label 4D 26 CLIO Input 2 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Current loop 1 input description.  The minimum and maximum settings define the range but they have no units.  The user can use the label to enter the transducer function and unit of measurement
CLI Minimum 4D 28 0 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
Current loop input 1 minimum setting.  Defines the lower range of the physical or electrical quantity measured by the transducer
CLI Maximum 4D 2A 100 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
Current loop input 1 maximum setting.  Defines the upper range of the physical or electrical quantity measured by the transducer
CLI Alarm 4D 2C Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Fn 4D 2E Over Over or Under
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Set 4D 30 50 From "MIN(CLI2Min, Max)" to "MAX(CLI2Min, Max))" step 0.1
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Delay 4D 32 1s 0s to 100s step 0.1s
Operating time-delay setting of current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Trip 4D 34 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI Trip Fn 4D 36 Over Over or Under
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Trip Set 4D 38 60 From "MIN(CLI2Min, Max)" to "MAX(CLI2Min, Max))" step 0.1
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI Trip Delay 4D 3A 0s 0s to 100s step 0.1s
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI I< Alarm 4D 3C Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop input 1 undercurrent element used to supervise the 4-20 mA input only
CLI I< Alm Set 4D 3E 0.0035 0mA to 4mA step 0.1mA
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 undercurrent element. (4 – 20 mA input only)
CLI3 PROTECTION 4D 41 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
CLI3 PROTECTION
CLI Input Status 4D 42 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop (transducer) input 1 element
CLI Input Type 4D 44 4-20mA 0 to 1mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA
Current loop 1 input type
CLI Input Label 4D 46 CLIO Input 3 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Current loop 1 input description.  The minimum and maximum settings define the range but they have no units.  The user can use the label to enter the transducer function and unit of measurement
CLI Minimum 4D 48 0 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
Current loop input 1 minimum setting.  Defines the lower range of the physical or electrical quantity measured by the transducer
CLI Maximum 4D 4A 100 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
Current loop input 1 maximum setting.  Defines the upper range of the physical or electrical quantity measured by the transducer
CLI Alarm 4D 4C Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Fn 4D 4E Over Over or Under
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Set 4D 50 50 From "MIN(CLI3Min, Max)" to "MAX(CLI3Min, Max))" step 0.1
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Delay 4D 52 1s 0s to 100s step 0.1s
Operating time-delay setting of current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Trip 4D 54 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI Trip Fn 4D 56 Over Over or Under
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Trip Set 4D 58 60 From "MIN(CLI3Min, Max)" to "MAX(CLI3Min, Max))" step 0.1
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI Trip Delay 4D 5A 0s 0s to 100s step 0.1s
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI I< Alarm 4D 5C Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop input 1 undercurrent element used to supervise the 4-20 mA input only
CLI I< Alm Set 4D 5E 0.0035 0mA to 4mA step 0.1mA
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 undercurrent element. (4 – 20 mA input only)
CLI4 PROTECTION 4D 61 Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
CLI4 PROTECTION
CLI Input Status 4D 62 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop (transducer) input 1 element
CLI Input Type 4D 64 4-20mA 0 to 1mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA
Current loop 1 input type
CLI Input Label 4D 66 CLIO Input 4 16-character text string (32 to 163)
Current loop 1 input description.  The minimum and maximum settings define the range but they have no units.  The user can use the label to enter the transducer function and unit of measurement
CLI Minimum 4D 68 0 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
Current loop input 1 minimum setting.  Defines the lower range of the physical or electrical quantity measured by the transducer
CLI Maximum 4D 6A 100 -9999 to 9999 step 0.1
Current loop input 1 maximum setting.  Defines the upper range of the physical or electrical quantity measured by the transducer
CLI Alarm 4D 6C Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Fn 4D 6E Over Over or Under
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Set 4D 70 50 From "MIN(CLI4Min, Max)" to "MAX(CLI4Min, Max))" step 0.1
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Alarm Delay 4D 72 1s 0s to 100s step 0.1s
Operating time-delay setting of current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Trip 4D 74 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI Trip Fn 4D 76 Over Over or Under
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 alarm element
CLI Trip Set 4D 78 60 From "MIN(CLI4Min, Max)" to "MAX(CLI4Min, Max))" step 0.1
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI Trip Delay 4D 7A 0s 0s to 100s step 0.1s
Operating mode of the current loop input 1 trip element
CLI I< Alarm 4D 7C Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables the current loop input 1 undercurrent element used to supervise the 4-20 mA input only
CLI I< Alm Set 4D 7E 0.0035 0mA to 4mA step 0.1mA
Pick-up setting for the current loop input 1 undercurrent element. (4 – 20 mA input only)
CLO OUTPUT1 4D 9F Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
CLO OUTPUT1
CLO Status 4D A0 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enable or disables the current loop (transducer) output 1 element
CLO Type 4D A2 4-20mA 0 to 1mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA
Current loop 1 output type
CLO Set Values 4D A4 Primary Primary or Secondary
This setting controls if the measured values from current loop output 1 are Primary or Secondary values
CLO Parameter 4D A6 IA Magnitude See CLIO measurement table
This setting defines the measured quantity assigned to current loop output 1
CLO Minimum 4D A8 See G155 table See CLIO measurement table
Current loop output 1 minimum setting.  Defines the lower range of the measurement
CLO Maximum 4D AA See G155 table See CLIO measurement table
Current loop output 1 maximum setting.  Defines the upper range of the measurement
CLO OUTPUT2 4D AF Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
CLO OUTPUT2
CLO Status 4D B0 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enable or disables the current loop (transducer) output 1 element
CLO Type 4D B2 4-20mA 0 to 1mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA
Current loop 1 output type
CLO Set Values 4D B4 Primary Primary or Secondary
This setting controls if the measured values from current loop output 1 are Primary or Secondary values
CLO Parameter 4D B6 IB Magnitude See CLIO measurement table
This setting defines the measured quantity assigned to current loop output 1
CLO Minimum 4D B8 See G155 table See CLIO measurement table
Current loop output 1 minimum setting.  Defines the lower range of the measurement
CLO Maximum 4D BA See G155 table See CLIO measurement table
Current loop output 1 maximum setting.  Defines the upper range of the measurement
CLO OUTPUT3 4D BF Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
CLO OUTPUT3
CLO Status 4D C0 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enable or disables the current loop (transducer) output 1 element
CLO Type 4D C2 4-20mA 0 to 1mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA
Current loop 1 output type
CLO Set Values 4D C4 Primary Primary or Secondary
This setting controls if the measured values from current loop output 1 are Primary or Secondary values
CLO Parameter 4D C6 IC Magnitude See CLIO measurement table
This setting defines the measured quantity assigned to current loop output 1
CLO Minimum 4D C8 See G155 Table See CLIO measurement table
Current loop output 1 minimum setting.  Defines the lower range of the measurement
CLO Maximum 4D CA See G155 Table See CLIO measurement table
Current loop output 1 maximum setting.  Defines the upper range of the measurement
CLO OUTPUT4 4D CF Sub-Heading Sub-Heading
CLO OUTPUT4
CLO Status 4D D0 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enable or disables the current loop (transducer) output 1 element
CLO Type 4D D2 4-20mA 0 to 1mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA
Current loop 1 output type
CLO Set Values 4D D4 Primary Primary or Secondary
This setting controls if the measured values from current loop output 1 are Primary or Secondary values
CLO Parameter 4D D6 IN Measured Mag See CLIO measurement table
This setting defines the measured quantity assigned to current loop output 1
CLO Parameter 4D D6 IN Derived Mag See CLIO measurement table
P642 only.
This setting defines the measured quantity assigned to current loop output 1
CLO Minimum 4D D8 See G155 Table See CLIO measurement table
Current loop output 1 minimum setting.  Defines the lower range of the measurement
CLO Maximum 4D DA See G155 Table See CLIO measurement table
Current loop output 1 maximum setting.  Defines the upper range of the measurement

System Data

CT and VT Ratios

Record Control

Disturbance Recorder Settings

Communications

MiCOM P821 T/J31 10E setting parameters & highlights (SC5012)


Overview

MiCOM P821 is an advanced Breaker Failure relay with backup protection functions. It offers a range of protection functions, combined with extensive monitoring capacities to give you optimized efficiency and maximum control for your electric schemes. It is suitable for all voltage levels.

For more detailed information on “MiCOM P821” relays, refer to Schneider protection relays manuals.

To see other supported devices, click here.


Setting Parameters


Breaker Failure Protection Settings for Group1

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
0200 Setting group n°1 Breaker Failure 0-1 1 F24 0
0201   Threshold I< 5 to 400 1 In/100 F1 10
0202   TBF1 delay 0 to 4000 5 1/1000 s F1 10
0203   TBF2 delay 0 to 4000 5 1/10 F1 40
0204   1st stage Reset 0 – 1 1   F27 0
0205   End fault 0 – 1 1   F42 0
0206   I_DZ> threshold 5 – 400 1 In/100 F1 100
0207   DZ delay 0 to 40000 5 1/1000 s F1 10
0208   Pole Discrepancy 0 – 1 1   F43 0
0209   I_PD> Threshold 8 – 400 1 In/100 F1 80
020A   I_PD< Threshold 5 – 100 1 In/100 F1 40
020B   PD Delay 0 to 40000 5 1/1000 s F1 10
020C   Phase Breaker failure 0-1 1   F56 0
020D   Earth Breaker failure 0-1 1   F57 0
020E   I0< Threshold N: 5 to 400
S: 1 to 400
VS: 2 to 800
1 In/100
In/100
In/1000
F1 N: 10
S: 5
VS: 25
020F   Phase Delay stage 1 0 to 40000 5 1/1000 s F1  
0210   Phase Delay stage 2 0 to 40000 5 1/1000 s F1  
0211   CB Fail Neg. Seq. 0 to 1 1   F24  
0212   I2< BF 5 to 200 1 1/100 F1  
0213   Neg. Delay stage 1 0 to 40000 5 1/1000 s F1  
0214   Neg. Delay stage 2 0 to 40000 5 1/1000 s F1  
0215   CB unhealthy 0 to 1 1   F24  
0216   CB unh. stage 1 0 to 40000 5 1/1000 s F1  
0217   CB unh. stage 2 0 to 40000 5 1/1000 s F1  
0218   Ie DZ>threshold N: 5 to 400
S: 1 to 400
VS: 2 to 800
1 In/100
In/100
In/1000
F1  
0219   External Non I Reset by 0 to 2 1   F62  

Other Setting Parameters

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
0100 Remote settings Address 1 to 255 1 F1 1
0101   Language 0 to 7 F1
0102   Password characters 1 and 2 32 -127 1 F10 AA
0103   Password characters 3 and 4 32 -127 1 F10 AA
0104   Frequency 50-60 10 Hz F1 50
0105   Phase A Labelling L1 – A – R VTA   F25 A
0106   Phase B Labelling L2 – B – S VTA   F25 B
0107   Phase C Labelling L3 – C – T VTA   F25 C
0108   Earth Labelling N – E – o VTA   F25 N
0109   Default display 1-3 1 F26 1
010A   User reference (characters 1 and 2) 32-127 1   F10 AL
010B   User reference (characters 3 and 4) 32-127 1   F10 ST
010C   Fault number to be displayed 1-5 1   F49 5
010D   Configuration of the logic inputs validation edge   0   F11 0
010E   Reserved          
010F   Type of the logic inputs input voltage 0-1 1   F50 0
0110 CB supervision CB operation number   1   F1  
0111   CB operating time   1 1/10 sec F1  
0112 to 0113   San IA     An F18  
0113 to 0114   San IB     An F18  
0114 to 0115   San IC     An F18  
0118   Wiring security 0 – 1 1   F52  
0119   Relay to test 1 1 – 8 1   F53  
011A   Relay to test 1 1 – 8 1   F53  
011B to 011E   Reserved          
011F   Latched relays       F14  
120 Ratios Phase CT: primary value 1 to 50000 1   F14 1000
0121   Phase CT: secondary value 1 to 5 4   F1 1
0122 Trip relay allocation Trip relay functionality (word 1) 0 to 65535 1   F6  
0123 Latching Trip relay latching function (word 1) 0 to 255 1 10 V F8  
0124 Ratio Earth CT: primary value 1 to 50000 1   F1 1000
0125   Earth CT: secondary value 1 to 5 4   F1 1
0126   Trip relay functionality (word 2) 0 to 65535 1   F6’  
0127 Latching Trip relay latching function (word 2) 0 to 65535 1   F8’  
0128 to 012F   Reserved          
0130 Communication Baud rate 0 to 7 1 F4 6 = 19200 bauds
0131   Parity 0 to 2 1 F5 0 = without
0132   Data bits 0 to 1 1   F28 1 = 8 bits
0133   Number of stop bits 0 to 1 1 F29 0 = 1 stop bit
0134   Comm. Available 0 to 1 1 F30 1 = COM available
0135   Date Format 0 to 1 0   F48 0 = Private
0136   Reserved          
0137   AddressRear Port          
0138 to 013F   Reserved          
0140 Setting group Active setting group 1 to 2 1 F1 1
0141   Validation of instantaneous self resetting 0 to 1 1   F1 0
0142   Configuration of the change of the setting group 0 to 1 1   F47 1
0143   Configuration of Battery and RAM error alarms 0 to 1 1   F1 0
0144   conf. TS AC/DC visible          
0145 to 014F   Reserved          
0150 LEDs
configuration
LED 5 (Word 1)   1 F19 0
0151   LED 6 (Word 1)   1 F19  
0152   LED 7 (Word 1)   1 F19  
0153   LED 8 (Word 1)   1   F19  
0154   LED 5 (Word 2)   1   F19’  
0155   LED 6 (Word 2)   1   F19’  
0156   LED 7 (Word 2)   1   F19’  
0157   LED 8 (Word 2)   1   F19’ 0
0158   LED 5 (Word 3)       F19’’  
0159   LED 6 (Word 3)       F19’’  
015A   LED 7 (Word 3)       F19’’  
015B   LED 8 (Word 3)       F19’’  
015C to 015F   Reserved          
0160 Logic inputs configuration Logic input 1 (Word 1) VTA 1 F15 0
0161   Logic input 2 (Word 1) VTA 1 F15 0
0162   Logic input 3 (Word 1) VTA 1 F15 0
0163   Logic input 4 (Word 1) VTA 1 F15 0
0164   Logic input 5 (Word 1) VTA 1 F15 0
019A   Logic input 1 (Word 2) VTA 1 F15’ 0
019B   Logic input 2 (Word 2) VTA 1 F15’ 0
019C   Logic input 3 (Word 2) VTA 1 F15’ 0
019D   Logic input 4 (Word 2) VTA 1 F15’ 0
019E   Logic input 5 (Word 2) VTA 1 F15’ 0
0165   Aux. Timer 1 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0
0166   Aux. Timer 2 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0
0167 Allocation of information to auxiliary output contact (RL2 to RL8) Phase A Retrip (DTA’) 0 to 7F 1 F14 0
0168   Phase B Retrip (DTA’) 0 to 7F 1 F14 0
0169   Phase C Retrip (DTA’) 0 to 7F 1 F14 0
016A   Retrip 1st stage (DTA’ | DTB’ | DTC’) 0 to 7F 1 F14 0
016B   General retrip (DTG) 0 to 7F 1 F14 0
016C   End fault protection (T_DZ) 0 to 7F 1 F14 0
016D   3 poles discrepancy 0 to 7F 1 F14 0
016E   Taux 1 0 to 7F 1 F14 0
016F   Taux 2 0 to 7F 1 F14 0
0170 Allocation of information to auxiliary output contact (RL2 to RL8) Trip 0 – 7 or
0 – 127
1 F14 0
0170 Disturbance records Pre-time 1 to 30 1 1/10 sec F1 1
0171   Post-time (phase 1 only) 1 to 30 1 1/10 sec F1 1
0172   Disturbance record (Trigger Configuration) 0 to 1 1 F22 0
0173 CB supervision Operating time 0-1 1 F44 0
0174   Operating time threshold 10 to 500 1 1/100 sec F1 1
0175   Number of operations 0-1 1 F44 0
0176   Max number of the CB operation 0 to 50000 1 F1 0
0177   SAn summation 0 – 1 1 F44 0
0178   SAn summation threshold 0 to 4000 1E+7 10e6 An    
0179   n 1 to 2 1   F1 1
017A   Tripping pulse 10 to 500 10 1/100 sec F1 10
017B Relay allocation 1st stage Earth Retrip (DTE’) 0 – 7F 1 F14 0
017C   Opening time on external order 0 – 7F 1   F14 0
017D   Number of tripping operation threshold 0 – 7F 1   F14 0
017E   SAn threshold 0 – 7F 1   F14 0
017F   Stage 1 opening time threshold 0 – 7F 1   F14 0
0180 to
0187
  Reserved          
0188   Phase Non I stage1 0 – 7F 1   F14  
0189   Earth Non I stage1 0 – 7F 1   F14  
018A   Negative Non I stage1 0 – 7F 1   F14  
018B   t Equ. A 0 – FFFF     F14  
018C   t Equ. B 0 – FFFF     F14  
018D   t Equ. C 0 – FFFF     F14  
018E   t Equ. D 0 – FFFF     F14  
018F   t Equ. E 0 – FFFF     F14  
0190   t Equ. F 0 – FFFF     F14  
0191   t Equ. G 0 – FFFF     F14  
0192   t Equ. H 0 – FFFF     F14  
0193   Non I stage1 0 – 7F 1   F14  
0194   Non I stage2 0 – 7F 1   F14  
0195   Negative stage1 0 – 7F 1   F14  
0196   CB Unhealthy stage1 0 – 7F 1   F14  
0197   CB Unhealthy stage2 0 – 7F 1   F14  
0198   Blokc Logic 1 0 – FFFF     F66  
0199   Blokc Logic 2 0 – FFFF     F66  
019F to 01F3   Reserved          

Description of Mapping Format


Code Format Description   Format Data  
  Type Description Bit Value Data
F1 Unsigned Integer Numerical Data: 0 – 65535
F2 Signed Integer Numerical Data: -32768 – 32767
F3   Reserved      
F4 Unsigned Integer Communications Speed 0 300
      1 600
      2 1200
      3 2400
      4 4800
      5 9600
      6 19200
      7 38400
F5 Unsigned Integer Communications Parity 0 None
      1 Even
      2 Odd
F6 Unsigned Integer Trip Relay Mapping (Part 1) 0 1 DTA’
      1 2 DTB’
      2 4 DTC’
      3 8 Stage 1
      4 16 Stage 2
      5 32 Dead zone
      6 64 Pole Discrepancy
      7 128 Aux. 1
      8 256 Aux. 2
      9 512 DTE’
      10 1024 Trip Phase Non I stage1
      11 2048 Trip Neg.  Non I stage1
      12 4096 Trip Neg.  stage1
      13 8192 Trip Non I stage1
      14 16384 Trip Unhealthy stage1
      15 32768 Trip Unhealthy stage2
F6′ Unsigned Integer Trip Relay Mapping (Part 2) 0 1 Trip Equation A
      1 2 Trip Equation B
      2 4 Trip Equation C
      3 8 Trip Equation D
      4 16 Trip Equation E
      5 32 Trip Equation F
      6 64 Trip Equation G
      7 128 Trip Equation H
      8 256 Trip Earth Non I stage1
      9 512 Trip Non I stage2
F7   Reserved
F8 Unsigned Integer Trip Relay Latching Mapping (Part 1) 0 1 DTA’
      1 2 DTB’
      2 4 DTC’
      3 8 Stage 1
      4 16 Stage 2
      5 32 Dead zone
      6 64 Pole Discrepancy
      7 128 Aux. 1
      8 256 Aux. 2
      9 512 DTE’
      10 1024 Phase Non I stage1
      11 2048 Negative Non I stage1
      12 4096 Negative stage1
      13 8192 Non I stage1
      14 16384 Unhealthy stage1
      15 32768 Unhealthy stage2
F8′ Unsigned Integer Trip Relay Latching Mapping (Part 2) 0 1 Earth Non I stage1
      1 2 Non I stage2
F9 Unsigned Integer Remote Control Word 1 0 1 Unlatch Trip Contact
      1 2 Acknowledge 1st Alarm
      2 4 Acknowledge All Alarms
      3 8 Reserved
      4 16 Reserved
      5 32 Change Setting Group
      6 64 Reserved
      7 128 Reserved
      8 256 Disturbance Record Remote Start
      9 512 Reserved
      10 1024 Reserved
      11 2048 Reserved
      12 4096 Manual event/fault/distur acknowledgement mode
      13 8192 Acknowledge Oldest Event Record
      14 16384 Acknowledge Oldest Fault Record
      15 32768 Acknowledge Hardware SRAM Alarm
F10   ASCII Characters 32 – 127 ASCII Character 1
      32 – 127 ASCII Character 2
F10′   ASCII Characters 32 – 127 ASCII Character 1
        32 – 127 ASCII Character 2
        32 – 127 ASCII Character 3
        32 – 127 ASCII Character 4
        32 – 127 ASCII Character 5
        32 – 127 ASCII Character 6
        32 – 127 ASCII Character 7
        32 – 127 ASCII Character 8
F11   Reserved
F12 Unsigned Integer Logic Inputs 0 1 Logic Input Number 1
      1 2 Logic Input Number 2
      2 4 Logic Input Number 3
      3 8 Logic Input Number 4
      4 16 Logic Input Number 5
F13 Unsigned Integer Output Contacts status 0 1 Output Contact RL1 (Trip)
      1 2 Output Contact RL2
      2 4 Output Contact RL3
      3 8 Ouptut Contact RL4
      4 16 Ouput Contact RL0 (Watchdog)
      5 32 Ouput Contact RL5
      6 64 Ouput Contact RL6
      7 128 Output Contact RL7
      8 256 Output Contact RL8
F14 Unsigned Integer Output Contact Mapping 0 1 Ouput Contact RL2
      1 2 Ouput Contact RL3
      2 4 Ouput Contact RL4
      3 8 Ouput Contact RL5
      4 16 Ouput Contact RL6
      5 32 Ouput Contact RL7
      6 64 Ouput Contact RL8
F15 Unsigned Integer Logic Input Mapping(word 1) 0 1 Trip phase A
      1 2 Trip phase B
      2 4 Trip phase C
      3 8 Trip 3 phase
      4 16 Relay unlatch
      5 32 52a
      6 64 52b
      7 128 tAux1
      8 256 tAux2
      9 512 Change Setting group
      10 1024 Disturbance recorder external start
      11 2048 Secu. 1
      12 4096 Secu. 2
      13 8192 LEDs reset
      14 16384 CB unhealthy
      15 32768 Block Logic 1
F15′ Unsigned Integer Logic Input Mapping(word 2) 0 1 Block Logic 2
      1 2 SYNCHRO
      2 4 External Non I Trip order
F16   Reserved      
F17 Unsigned Integer Internal logic data 0 1 Latching
      1 2 Trip
F18 Signed Long Integer Numerical Data : -2147483648 to 2147483647
F19 Unsigned Integer User Configurable LED Mapping (Part 1) 0 1 External DTA
      1 2 External DTB
      2 4 External DTC
      3 8 External DTRI
      4 16 Backup DTA’
      5 32 Backup DTB’
      6 64 Backup DTC’
      7 128 t Stage 1
      8 256 t Stage 2
      9 512 Problem secu 1
      10 1024 Problem secu 2
      11 2048 t_DZ
      12 4096 tPD
      13 8192 tAux1
      14 16384 tAux2
      15 32768 Backup DTE’
F19′ Unsigned Integer User Configurable LED Mapping (Part 2) 0 1 CB Open time  ext.
      1 2 CB operation Nb
      2 4 Sum A n
      3 8 CB Open time st.1
      4 16 Earth Non I stage1
      5 32 Negative Non I  stage1
      6 64 Retrip order negative
      7 128 Non I general retrip
      8 256 CB Unhealthy stage1
      9 512 CB Unhealthy stage2
      10 1024 Logic Equation A
      11 2048 Logic Equation B
      12 4096 Logic Equation C
      13 8192 Logic Equation D
      14 16384 Logic Equation E
      15 32768 Logic Equation F
F19” Unsigned Integer User Configurable LED Mapping (Part 3) 0 1 Logic Equation G
      1 2 Logic Equation H
      2 4 Phase.Non I   Stage1
      3 8 Non I  general back-up
F20 Unsigned Integer Logic Input Data Status 0 1 External trip order phase A
      1 2 External trip order phase B
      2 4 External trip order phase C
      3 8 External trip order 3 phase
      4 16 Relay Unlatch
      5 32 52a
      6 64 52b
      7 128 tAux1
      8 256 tAux2
      9 512 Change Setting group
      10 1024 Disturbance record Start
      11 2048 Secu. 1
      12 4096 Secu. 2
      13 8192 LEDs reset
      14 16384 CB Unhealthy
      15 32768 Block Logic 1
F20′ Unsigned Integer Logic Input Data Status 0 1 Block Logic 2
      1 2 GPS time synchro
      2 4 External non I input
      3 8 Reserved
F21 Unsigned Integer Software Version 10 Version 1.A
      11 Version 1.B
      20 Version2.A etc…
F22 Unsigned Integer Disturbance record start kinds 0 1 Disturbance record starts on Ins.
      1 2 Disturbance record starts onTrip
F23 Unsigned Integer Quick Read Status Byte Format 0 1 Major Hardware Alarm Present
      1 2 Minor Hardware Alarm Present
      2 4 Non-Acknowledged Event Available
      3 8 Time Synchronisation State
      4 16 Non-Acknowledged Disturbance Record Available
      5 32 Non-Acknowledged Fault Record Available
F24 Unsigned Integer Breaker failure functionality 0 Disabled/No
      1 Enabled/Yes
F25 Characters ASCII        
F26 Unsigned Integer Default Display Selection 1 IA RMS Measurement
      2 IB RMS Measurement
      3 IC RMS Measurement
      4 IN RMS Measurement
      5 IA, IB, IC, IN RMS Measurements
F27 Unsigned Integer 1st stage reset configuration 0 Disabled/No
        1 Enabled/Yes
F28 Unsigned Integer Communications data Bits 0 1 7 bit data
      1 2 8 bit datas
F29 Unsigned Integer Communications Stop Bits 0 1 Stop Bit
      1 2 Stop Bits
F30 Unsigned Integer Rear communication Availability 0 1 Communications Disabled
      1 2 Communications Enabled
F31 Unsigned Integer 50 BF flag 0 1 1st stage delayed Breaker failure data
      1 2 2nd stage delayed Breaker failure data
      2 4 Configuration problem
      3 8 Non I stage 1
      4 16 Non I stage 2
      5 32 CB Unhealthy stage1
      6 64 CB Unhealthy stage2
      7 128 Phase configuration problem
      8 256 Earth configuration problem
      9 512 Negative configuration problem
           
F32 Unsigned Integer Security flag 0 1 Security problem1
      1 2 Security problem2
      2 4 EL configured on Secu1
      3 8 EL configured on Secu2
      4 16 Security Configuration problem
F33 Unsigned Integer Phase current & 50 BF flag 0 1 Indicates the current presence
      1 2 Instant information for current presence
      2 4 Stage 1 information for current presence
      3 8 Indicates the first detection of current presence
F34 Unsigned Integer CB position 0 1 Wrong configuration of Breaker position
      1 2 Wrong Breaker position
      2 4 CB on Open Position
          Reserved
F35 Unsigned Integer End fault function data status 0 1 Instantaneous data DZ
      1 2 Delayed data T_DZ
      2 4 DZ Configuration problem
      3 8 Phase A threshold crossed
      4 16 Phase B threshold crossed
      5 32 Phase C threshold crossed
F36 Unsigned Integer Pole discrepancy function data status 0 1 Instantaneous data PD
      1 2 Delayed data T_PD
      2 4 PD Configuration problem
      3 8 Phase A threshold crossed
      4 16 Phase B threshold crossed
      5 32 Phase C threshold crossed
F37 Unsigned Integer End fault protection memorisation 0 1 Instantaneous data DZ
      1 2 Delayed data T_DZ
F38 Unsigned Integer Pole discrepancy function memorisation 0 1 Instantaneous data PD
      1 2 Delayed data T_PD
F39   Reserved      
F40 Unsigned Integer Aux. data Memorisation 0 1 Aux1
      1 2 Aux2
F41   Communications Port Allocation 0 Front and Rear Port ModBus Communications
      1 Front Port ModBus and Rear Port Courier Communications
      2 Front Port ModBus and Rear Port VDEW Communications
F42 Unsigned Integer End Fault protection function 0 1 Disabled
      1 2 Enabled
F43 Unsigned Integer Pole discrepancy function 0 1 Disabled
      1 2 Enabled
F44 Unsigned Integer Breaker supervision function 0 1 Disabled
      1 2 Enabled
F45 Unsigned Integer Hardware Alarm Status 0 1 Watchdog
      1 2 User Communications Failure
      2 4 SETTING Failure
      3 8 ANA Failure
      4 16 Real Time Clock Failure
      5 32 EEPROM Failure
      6 64 SRAM Failure
      7 128 DEFAUT SETTING
      8 256 Main Power Supply
      9 512 Auxiliary Power Supplies
      10 1024 Transformers Offset Failure
F46 Unsigned Integer 50 BF supervision flag 0 1 Breaker longest operating time elapsed on external order
      1 2 Breaker longest operating time elapsed on 1st stage order
      2 4 Maximum number of breaker operation reached
      3 8 CB SA2N elapsed
F47 Unsigned Integer Configuration group change 0 change on Input edge or remote order or via front panel
      1 change on Input level change
F48 Unsigned integer Modbus Date Format Configuration   0 Private
        1 IEC
F49 Unsigned Integer Fault number to be displayed 0 None
      1~25 1~25
F50 Unsigned Integer Opto Power Supply Configuration 0 DC Supply
      1 AC Supply
F51 Unsigned Integer Remote Control Word 2 0 1 Unlatch trip relaly
      1 2 Unlatch output relay
      2 4 Reserved
      3 8 Reset SA2n
      4 16 Reset CB Open Number
      5 32 Reset event number
          Reserved
F52 Unsigned Integer Wiring check function 0 Disable
      1 Enable
F53 Unsigned Integer Relay to test 0 1 Relay 1 (Trip)
      1 2 Relay 2
      2 4 Relay 3
      3 8 Relay 4(watch dog)
      4 16 Relay 5
      5 32 Relay 6
      6 64 Relay 7
      7 128 Relay 8
F54 Unsigned Integer Aux. Input Data 0 1 Disable
      1 2 Enable
F55 Unsigned Integer Number of disturbance records 0 None
      1 1
      2 2
      3 3
      4 4
      5 5
F56 Unsigned Integer Breaker fail phase function 0 Disable
      1 Enable
F57 Unsigned  Integer Breaker fail earth function 0 Disable
      1 Enable
F58 Unsigned Integer Boolean Equation Operand   0 None
        1 Ph. A Stage 1
        2 Ph. B Stage 1
        3 Ph. C Stage 1
        4 Earth Non I   stage1
        5 Earth Stage 1
        6 Neg. Non I    stage1
        7 Neg. Stage 1
        8 Phase.Non I   Stage1
        9 CB unhealthy stage 1
        10 CB unhealthy stage 2
        11 t Stage 1
        12 t Stage 2
        13 t dead Zone
        14 t Pole Discre.
        15 t Aux1
        16 t Aux2
        17 CB open ext.
        18 CB open st. 1
        19 CB NB. op.
        20 Sum A n
        21 Input 1
        22 Input 2
        23 Input 3
        24 Input 4
        25 Input 5
        26 Non I stage1
        27 Non I stage2
F59 Unsigned Integer Boolean Equation Operator   0 OR
        1 OR NOT
        2 AND
        3 AND NOT
F61 Unsigned Integer Logic Equation Flag 0 1 Equation A
      1 2 Equation B
      2 4 Equation C
      3 8 Equation D
      4 16 Equation E
      5 32 Equation F
      6 64 Equation G
      7 128 Equation H
F62 Unsigned Integer External Non I Reset by   0 Reset by current/Default
        1 Reset by CB open
        2 Reset by current & CB open
F63 Unsigned Integer Remote Control Word 3 0 1 Reserved
      1 2 Reserved
      2 4 Acknowledge Oldest Disturbance Record
      3 8 Reserved
      4 16 Reserved
      5 32 Reserved
      6 64 Reserved
      7 128 Reserved
      8 256 Reserved
      9 512 Reserved
      10 1024 Reserved
      11 2048 Reserved
      12 4096 Reserved
      13 8192 Reserved
      14 16384 Erase all records (events, faults, alarms, disturbances,etc)
      15 32768 Reserved
F65 Unsigned Integer Memo alarm flag 1 0 1 Phase Non I stage1
      1 2 Earth Non I stage1
      2 4 Negative Non I stage1
      3 8 Negative stage1
      4 16 Equation A
      5 32 Equation B
      6 64 Equation C
      7 128 Equation D
      8 256 Equation E
      9 512 Equation F
      10 1024 Equation G
      11 2048 Equation H
F66 Unsigned Integer Blocking Logic Mapping 0 1 CBF phase
      1 2 CBF earth
      2 4 CBF neg.
      3 8 Dead zone
      4 16 Pole discrepancy
      5 32 tAux1
      6 64 tAux2
F98 Unsigned Integer auxiliary power supply self test status 0 1 -3V3 out of range
      1 2 5V0 out of range
      2 4 3V3 out of range
      3 8 12V out of range
      4 16 1V3 out of range
      5 32 0V  out of range
F99 Unsigned Integer Transformer self test status 0 1 Abnormal offset with transformer 1
      1 2 Abnormal offset with transformer 2
      2 4 Abnormal offset with transformer 3
      3 8 Abnormal offset with transformer 4
      4 16 Abnormal offset with transformer 5
      5 32 Abnormal offset with transformer 6
      6 64 Abnormal offset with transformer 7
      7 128 Abnormal offset with transformer 8
      8 256 Abnormal offset with transformer 9

MiCOM P92x M/J62 V12D setting parameters & highlights (SC5013)


Overview

MiCOM P92x voltage and frequency management relays provide an integrated solution for the secure and efficient operations of power systems.

Models available: MiCOM P921, MiCOM P922, MiCOM P923, MiCOM P925

For more detailed information on “MiCOM P92x” relays, refer to Schneider protection relays manuals.

To see other supported devices, click here.


Setting Parameters


General Setting Parameters

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
0100 Remote settings Address 1 to 255 1 F1 1
0101   Reserved
0102   Password characters 1 and 2 32 -127 1 F10 AA
0103   Password characters 3 and 4 32 -127 1 F10 AA
0104   Frequency 50-60 10 Hz F1 50
0105 to 108   Reserved          
0109   Default display 1 – 8 1   F26 1
010A   User reference (characters 1 and 2) 32-127 1   F10 AL
010B   User reference (characters 3 and 4) 32-127 1   F10 ST
010C   Fault number to be displayed (P922 & P923 only) 1-25 1   F31 25
010D   Configuration of the validation edge of the logic inputs   0   F12 0
010E   Reserved          
010F   Type of input voltage Of the logic inputs 0-1 1   F50 0
110 CB supervision
(P922-P923 ) only
CB operations number   1   F1  
0111   CB operating time   1 1/100 sec F1  
0112 – 0117   Reserved          
0118   CB closing time   1 1/100 sec F1  
0119 to 011E   Reserved          
011F   Latched relays       F14  
120 Ratios Phase VT: primary value A: 10 to 100000
B: 22 to 48
1 10 V F51 A: 2000
B: 22
0122   Phase VT: secondary value A: 570 to 1300
B: 2200 to 4800
1 V/10 F1 A: 1000
B: 2200
0123   Residual VT: primary value A: 10 to
100000
B: 22 to 48
1 10 V F51 A: 2000
B: 22
0125   Residual VT: secondary value A: 570 to 1300
B: 2200 to 4800
1 V/10 F1 A: 1000
B: 2200
0126 Configuration Connection 0 to 3 1   F52 0
0127   Protection 0 to 1 1   F53 0
0128 df/dt Integration time (number of cycles for calculation of the average df/dt) 1 – 200 1   F1 1
0129   Confirmations number for df/dt protection 2 or 4 2   F1 4
012A Frequency Under voltage blocking threshold (U<Blk ) for frequency elements to 1300 or
200 to 4800
1
or 5
V/10 F1 50 or 200
012B du/dt Confirmations number 2 to 4 1   F1 4
012C df/dt Inhib. Block. df/dt>20 Hz/s 0 – 1 1   F24 0
012D – 012E   Reserved          
12F Output relays Fail safe relays 0 – 255 1   F114 0
0130 Communicatio n Baud rate 0 to 7 1 F4 6 = 19200 bauds
0131   Parity 0 to 2 1 F5 0 = without
0132   Reserved          
0133   Number of stop bits 0 to 1 1 F29 0 = 1 stop bit
0134   Comm. available 0 to 1 1 F30 1 = COM available
0135   Date Format 0 to 1 1   F33  
0136   Reserved          
0137   Rear port address 1 to 255 1     1
0138 – 013F   Relay description (Courier) 32-127 1   F10  
0140 Setting group Active setting group 1 to 2 (P922/P923) 1 (P921) 1 F1 1
0141   Validation of instantaneous self resetting 0 to 1 1   F1 0
0142   Configuration of the change of the setting group 0 to 1 1   F60 0
0143   Configuration of Battery and RAM error alarms 0 to 1 1   F1 0
0144 Alarms inhib U> alarm 0 – 1 1   F24 0
0145   U>> alarm 0 – 1 1   F24 0
0146   U>>> alarm 0 – 1 1   F24 0
0147   Reserved          
0148 Output Relays du/dt1 0 – 127 1   F14 0
0149   du/dt2 0 – 127 1   F14 0
014A   du/dt3 0 – 127 1   F14 0
014B   du/dt4 0 – 127 1   F14 0
014C – 014F   Do not use          
0150 Leds configuration Led 5, part 1   1 F19a 0
0151   Led 6, part 1   1 F19a 0
0152   Led 7, part 1   1 F19a 0
0153   Led 8, part 1   1   F19a 0
0154   Led 5, part 2   1   F19b 0
0155   Led 6, part 2   1   F19b 0
0156   Led 7, part 2   1   F19b 0
0157   Led 8, part 2   1   F19b 0
0158   Led 5, part 3   1   F19c 0
0159   Led 6, part 3   1   F19c 0
015A   Led 7, part 3   1   F19c 0
015B   Led 8, part 3   1   F19c 0
015C   Led 5, part 4   1   F19d 0
015D   Led 6, part 4   1   F19d 0
015E   Led 7, part 4   1   F19d 0
015F   Led 8, part 4   1   F19d 0
0160 Logic inputs configuration Logic input 1 VTA   F15a 0
0161   Logic input 2 VTA   F15a 0
0162   Logic input 3 (P922-P923) VTA   F15a 0
0163   Logic input 4 (P922-P923) VTA   F15a 0
0164   Logic input 5 (P922-P923) VTA   F15a 0
0165 Output relays (RL2 to RL8) df/dt1 0 to 127 1 F14 0
0166   df/d2 0 to 127 1 F14 0
0167   df/dt3 0 to 127 1 F14 0
0168   df/dt4 0 to 127 1 F14 0
0169   df/dt5 0 to 127 1 F14 0
016A   df/dt6 0 to 127 1 F14 0
016B – 016F   Do not use          
0170 Output relays (RL2 to RL8) Trip 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0171   Closing order 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0172   tV< 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0173   tV<< 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0174   tV<<< 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0175   tV> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0176   tV>> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0177   tV>>> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0178   tVo> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0179   tVo>> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
017A   tVo>>> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
017B   V< 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
017C   V<< 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
017D   V<<< 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
017E   V> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
017F   V>> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0180   V>>> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0181   Vo> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0182   Vo>> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0183   Vo>>> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0184   tAux 1 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0185   tAux 2 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0186   tV2> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0187   V2>> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0188   tV1< 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0189   tV1<< 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
018A   tf1 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
018B   tf2 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
018C   tf3 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
018D   tf4 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
018E   tf5 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
018F   tf6 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0190   V2> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0191   V2>> 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0192   V1< 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0193   V1<< 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0194   f1 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0195   f2 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0196   f3 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0197   f4 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0198   f5 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
0199   f6 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
019A   CB alarms of operations, closing time, operating time 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
019B   Frequency out of range 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
019C   CB failure 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
019D   Boolean equation A 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
019E   Boolean equation B 0 – 7 or 0 – 127 1 F14 0
019F   Boolean equation C 0 – 127     F14  
01A0   Boolean equation D 0 – 127     F14  
01A1   Active group 0 – 127     F14  
01A2 – 01CC   Do not use          
01CD   Trip configuration, part 3 0 to 3FF or FFFF 1   F7b 0
01CE   Latched functions (3) 0 to 1FFF or 7FFF 1 F7b 0
01CF   Reserved          
01D0 Automat. ctrl Trip configuration, part 1 0 to 1FFF or 7FFF 1 F6 0
01D1   Trip configuration, part 2 0 to 3FF or FFFF     F7a 0
01D2   Latched functions (1) 0 to 1FFF or 7FFF 1 F6 0
01D3   Latched functions (2) 0 to 3FF or FFFF     F7a 0
01D4   Blocking logic 1, part 1 0 to 1FFF 1 F8a 0
01D5   Blocking logic 1, part 2 0 to 3FF or FFFF     F7a 0
01D6   Blocking logic 2, part 1 0 to 1FFF 1 F8a 0
01D7   Blocking logic 2, part 2 0 to 3FF or FFFF     F7a 0
01D8   Do not use          
01D9   Do not use          
01DA   Do not use          
01DB   Do not use          
01DC   Auxiliary timer 1 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0
01DD   Auxiliary timer 2 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0
01DE   Reserved          
01DF   Frequency disturbance record (Trigger configuration) 0-2 1   F57 0
01E0 Disturbance records Pre-time 1 to 29
1 to 29
1 to 49
1 to 69
1 to 89
1 1/10 sec F1 1
01E1   Do not use          
01E2   Disturbance record (Trigger Configuration) 0 to 1 1 F32 0
01E3 CB supervision Number of operations 0-1 1 F24 0
01E4   Max number of the CB operation 0 – 50000 1 F1 0
01E5   Supervision of the operating time 0-1 1 F24 0
01E6   Max operating time 10 to 500 5 1/100 sec F1 10
01E7   Supervision of the closing time 0-1 1 F24 0
01E8   Max closing time 10 to 500 5 1/100 sec F1 10
01E9   Time period for average/max values 5 to 60 VTA min F42 5
01EA   Tripping pulse 10 to 500 5 1/100 sec F1 10
01EB   Closing pulse 10 to 500 5 1/100 F1 10
01EC   Do not use          
01ED   Do not use          
01EE   Do not use          
01EF   Do not use          
01F0 Output Relays Logic input 1 0 – 127 1   F14 0
01F1   Logic input 2 0 – 127 1   F14 0
01F2   Logic input 3 0 – 127 1   F14 0
01F3   Logic input 4 0 – 127 1   F14 0
01F4   Logic input 5 0 – 127 1   F14 0
01F5 – 01F9   Do not use          
01FA Alarms inhib. du/dt1 0 – 1 1   F24 0
01FB   du/dt2 0 – 1 1   F24 0
01FC   du/dt3 0 – 1 1   F24 0
01FD   du/dt4 0 – 1 1   F24 0
01FE   Reserve          
01FF   Reserve          

Undervoltage protection (P921- P922 and P923)

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
200 Setting group n°1 V< configuration 0-2 1 F55 0
201   Threshold V< 50 to 1300 or
200 to 4800
1 or 5 V/10 F1 50 or 200
202   Type of temporisation 0 to 1 1 F27 0
203   TMS value for V< 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10
204   tRESET temporisation 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 10
205   V< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
206   Inhibition U< by 52a 0 – 1 1   F24 0
0207 to 020F   Reserved         0
210   V<< configuration 0-2 1 F55 0
211   Threshold V<< 50 to 1300 or
200 to 4800
1
or 5
V/10 F1 50 or 200
212   V<< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1
213   Inhibition U<< by 52a 0 – 1 1   F24 0
0214 to 021F   Reserved         0
220   V<<< configuration 0-2 1 F55 0
221   Threshold V<<< 50 to 1300 or
200 to 4800
1
or 5
V/10 F1 50 or 200
222   V<<< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1
223   Inhibition U<<< by 52a 0 – 1 1   F24 0
0224 to 022E   Reserved         0
022F   V< Hysteresis 102 to 105 1 % or 1/100 F1 102

Overvoltage protection (P921 -P922 and P923)

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
230   V> configuration 0-2 1 F55 0
231   Threshold V> 50 to 2000 or
200 to 7200
1 or 5 V/10 F1 1300 or 4800
232   Type of temporisation 0 to 1 1 F27 0
233   TMS value for V> 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10
234   tRESET temporisation 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 1
235   V> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
0236 to 023F   Reserved         0
240   V>> configuration 0-2 1 F55 0
241   Threshold V>> 50 to 2600 or
200 to 9600
1 or 5 V/10 F1 1300 or 4800
242   V>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1
0243 to 024F   Reserved         0
250   V>>> configuration 0-2 1 F55 0
251   Threshold V>>> 50 to 2600 or
200 to 9600
1 or 5 V/10 F1 1300 or 4800
252   V>>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1
0253 to 025E   Reserved         0
025F   V> Hysteresis 95 to 98 1 % or 1/100 F1 98

Zero sequence overvoltage protection (P921- P922 and P923)

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
260   Vo> configuration 0-1 1 F24 0
261   Threshold Vo> 5 to 1300 or
20 to 4800
1 or 5 V/10 F1 50 or 200
262   Type of temporisation 0 to 1 1 F27 0
263   TMS value for Vo> 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10
264   tRESET temporisation 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 1
265   Vo> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
0266 to 026F   Reserved         0
270   Vo>> configuration 0-1 1 F24 0
271   Threshold Vo>> 5 to 1300 or
20 to 4800
1 or 5 V/10 F1 50 or 200
272   Vo>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
0273 to 027F   Reserved         0
280   Vo>>> configuration 0-1 1 F24 0
281   Threshold Vo>>> 5 to 1300 or
20 to 4800
1 or 5 V/10 F1 50 or 200
282   Vo>>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
0283 to 028F   Reserved         0

Negative sequence overvoltage protection (P922- P923) and F + df/dt protection (P923)

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
290   V2> configuration 0-1 1 F24 0
291   Threshold V2> 50 to 2000 or
200 to 7200
1 or 5 V/10 F1 1300 or 4800
292   Type of temporisation 0 to 1 1 F27 0
293   TMS value for V2> 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10
294   tRESET temporisation 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 1
295   V2> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
0296 to 029F   Reserved         0
02A0   V2>> configuration 0-1 1 F24 0
02A1   Threshold V2>> 50 to 2000 or
200 to 7200
1 or 5 V/10 F1 1300 or 4800
02A2   V2>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
02A3 to 02AF   Reserved         0

Positive sequence undervoltage protection (P922 – P923)

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
02B0   V1< configuration 0-1 1 F24 0
02B1   Threshold V1< 50 to 1300 or
200 to 4800
1 or 5 V/10 F1 50 or 200
02B2   Type of temporisation 0 to 1 1 F27 0
02B3   TMS value V1< 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10
02B4   tRESET temporisation 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 1
02B5   V1< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
02B6 to 02BF   Reserved         0
02C0   V1<< configuration 0-1 1 F24 0
02C1   Threshold V1<< 50 to 1300 or
200 to 4800
1 or 5 V/10 F1 50 or 200
02C2   V1<< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

V0 derived voltage protection (P922 – P923)

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
02C3 V0 derived V0der> activation 0 – 1 1 F24 0
02C4   V0der> threshold A: 5 – 1300
B: 20 – 4800
1
5
1/10 V F1 A: 50
B: 200
02C5   V0der> Delay type 0 – 1 1   F27 0
02C6   TMS 5 – 1000 5 1/10 F1 10
02C7   t Reset V0der> 0 – 10000 1 1/100 s F1 1
02C8   t V0der> 0 – 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
02C9   V0der>> activation 0 – 1 1 F24 0
02CA   V0der>> threshold A: 5 – 1300
B: 20 – 4800
1
5
1/10 V F1 A: 50
B: 200
02CB   t V0der>> 0 – 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
02CC   V0der>>> activation 0 – 1 1 F24 0
02CD   V0der>>> threshold A: 5 – 1300
B: 20 – 4800
1
5
1/10 V F1 A: 50
B: 200
02CE   t V0der>>> 0 – 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
02CF   Reserved         0

Under/overfrequency (P922 – P923)

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
02D0   f1 0-2 1 F56 0
02D1   Threshold f1 4000 to 6000 if fn= 50Hz
5000 to 7000 if fn= 60Hz
1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or 6000
02D2   f1 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
02D3   f2 0-2 1 F56 0
02D4   Threshold f2 4000 to 6000 if fn= 50Hz
5000 to 7000 if fn= 60Hz
1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or 6000
02D5   f2 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
02D6   f3 0-2 1 F56 0
02D7   Threshold f3 4000 to 6000 if fn= 50Hz
5000 to 7000 if fn= 60Hz
1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or 6000
02D8   f3 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
02D9   f4 0-2 1 F56 0
02DA   Threshold f4 4000 to 6000 if fn= 50Hz
5000 to 7000 if fn= 60Hz
1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or 6000
02DB   f4 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
02DC   f5 0-2 1 F56 0
02DD   Threshold f5 4000 to 6000 if fn= 50Hz
5000 to 7000 if fn= 60Hz
1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or 6000
02DE   f5 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4
02DF   f6 0-2 1 F56 0
02E0   Threshold f6 4000 to 6000 if fn= 50Hz
5000 to 7000 if fn= 60Hz
1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or 6000
02E1   f6 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

Rate of change of frequency ( Only MiCOM P923)

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
02E2   df/dt1 0-1 1   F24 0
02E3   df/dt1 threshold -100 to 100 1 1/10 Hz/s F2 10
02E4   df/dt2 0-1 1   F24 0
02E5   df/dt2 threshold -100 to 100 1 1/10 Hz/s F2 10
02E6   df/dt3 0-1 1   F24 0
02E7   df/dt3 threshold -100 to 100 1 1/10 Hz/s F2 10
02E8   df/dt4 0-1 1   F24 0
02E9   df/dt4 threshold -100 to 100 1 1/10 Hz/s F2 10
02EA   df/dt5 0-1 1   F24 0
02EB   df/dt5 threshold -100 to 100 1 1/10 Hz/s F2 10
02EC   df/dt6 0-1 1   F24 0
02ED   df/dt6 threshold -100 to 100 1 1/10 Hz/s F2 10
02EE to 02EF   Reserved          

Rate of change of Voltage ( Only MiCOM P923)

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
02F0   du/dt1 activation 0 – 4 1   F62 0
02F1   du/dt1 U threshold +/-10 to +/-2000 or
+/-40 to +/-7200
5 1/10 V F2 A: 100
B: 400
02F2   du/dt1 U threshold 10 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 100
02F3   du/dt2 activation 0 – 4 1   F62 0
02F4   du/dt2 U threshold +/-10 to +/-2000 or
+/-40 to +/-7200
5 1/10 V F2 A: 100
B: 400
02F5   du/dt2 U threshold 10 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 100
02F6   du/dt3 activation 0 – 4 1   F62 0
02F7   du/dt3 U threshold +/-10 to +/-2000 or
+/-40 to +/-7200
5 1/10 V F2 A: 100
B: 400
02F8   du/dt3 U threshold 10 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 100
02F9   du/dt4 activation 0 – 4 1   F62 0
02FA   du/dt4 U threshold +/-10 to +/-2000 or
+/-40 to +/-7200
5 1/10 V F2 A: 100
B: 400
02FB   du/dt4 U threshold 10 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 100

Voltage balance ( Only MiCOM P923)

Address Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default settings
02FC Voltage balance Voltage balance activation K< 0-1 1   F24 0
02FD   Voltage balance threshold K< 50 – 100 1 0.01 F1 50
02FE – 2FF   Reserved          

Hardware Configuration

Address Group Description Values Step Unit Format Default Product
0600 Output relays F1 + df/dt1 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P923
0601   F2 + df/dt2 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P923
0602   F3 + df/dt3 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P923
0603   F4 + df/dt4 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P923
0604   F5 + df/dt5 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P923
0605   F6 + df/dt6 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P923
0606   tAux 3 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
0607   tAux 4 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
0608   tAux 5 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
0609   tVTS 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
060A   V0der> 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
060B   tV0der> 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
060C   V0der>> 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
060D   tV0der>> 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
060E   V0der>>> 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
060F   tV0der>>> 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
0610   Boolean equation E 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P921-2-3
0611   Boolean equation F 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P921-2-3
0612   Boolean equation G 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P921-2-3
0613   Boolean equation H 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P921-2-3
0614 Communicati on orders Communication order 1 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
0615   Communication order 2 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
0616   Communication order 3 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
0617   Communication order 4 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P922-3
0618 Output relays Voltage Balance K1< 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P923
0619   Voltage Balance K2< 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P923
061A   Voltage Balance K3 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P923
061B   Voltage Balance K< Poly 0 – 127 1 F14 0 P923
061C-
061F
  Not used            
0685 Alarm inhibition Voltage Balance K1< 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0686   Voltage Balance K2< 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0687   Voltage Balance K3< 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0688 Alarm inhibition Voltage Balance Kpoly< 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0689 – 068F   Not used            
0620 LEDs config LED 5 part 5   1   F19e 0 P922-3
0621   LED 6 part 5   1   F19e 0 P922-3
0622   LED 7 part 5   1   F19e 0 P922-3
0623   LED 8 part 5   1   F19e 0 P922-3
0624   LED 5 part 6   1   F19f 0 P921-2-3
0625   LED 6 part 6   1   F19f 0 P921-2-3
0626   LED 7 part 6   1   F19f 0 P921-2-3
0627   LED 8 part 6   1   F19f 0 P921-2-3
0628 – 062F   Not used            
0630 Timers values Timer aux 3 0 – 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0 P922-3
0631   Timer aux 4 0 – 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0 P922-3
0632   Timer aux 5 0 – 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0 P922-3
0633-
063F
  Not used            
0640 Blocking logic Blocking logic 1, part 3 0-FFFF 1   F8b 0 P922-3
0641   Blocking logic 2, part 3 0-FFFF 1   F8b 0 P922-3
0642 Trip Trip configuration, part 4 0 to FFFF 1   F7c 0 P921-2-3
0643 Latch Latched functions (4) 0 to FFFF 1   F7c 0 P921-2-3
0644 Disturbance records Records number 1 – 5 1   F1 5 P922-3
0645   Not used            
0646 Communicati on IEC-103 GI selection 0 – 1 1   F76 0 P922-3
0647 Communicati on IEC-103 Type of uploaded spontaneous events 0 – 3 1   F77 0 P922-3
0648 Communicati on IEC-103 Type of Measurements 0 – 7 1   F78 0 P922-3
0649 Communicati on IEC-103 Signal & measurement
/ Commands blocking
0 – 3 1   F79 0 P922-3
064A – 064F   Not used            
0650 VTS VTS activation 0 – 1 1 F24 0 P922-3
0651   VTS Temporization 0 – 10000 1 1/100 s F1 500 P922-3
0652   Delta V0 threshold A: 20 – 1300
B:100 – 4800
1 1/10 V F1 A: 150
B: 500
P922-3
0653   Blocked functions 0 – FFh 1   F64 0 P922-3
0654   Detection mode 1 – 3 1   F65 1 P922-3
0655   Inhibition by 52a 0 – 1 1   F1 0 P922-3
0656-
065F
  Not used            
0660 Alarms inhibition U< 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
0661   U<< 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
0662   U<<< 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
0663   tAux1 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
0664   tAux2 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
0665   tAux3 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
0666   tAux4 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
0667   tAux5 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
0668   F1 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
0669   F2 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
066A   F3 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
066B   F4 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
066C   F5 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
066D   F6 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
066E   df/dt1 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
066F   df/dt2 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0670   df/dt3 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0671   df/dt4 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0672   df/dt5 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0673   df/dt6 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0674   F+df/dt1 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0675   F+df/dt2 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0676   F+df/dt3 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0677   F+df/dt4 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0678   F+df/dt5 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0679   F+df/dt6 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
067A   Bool. equation A 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
067B   Bool. equation B 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
067C   Bool. equation C 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
067D   Bool. equation D 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
067E   Bool. equation E 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
067F   Bool. equation F 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
0680   Bool. equation G 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
0681   Bool. equation H 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P921-2-3
0682   Frequency out 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
0683   tVTS 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
0684   Ctrl Trip 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
0685 Alarm inhibition Voltage Balance K1< 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0686   Voltage Balance K2< 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0687   Voltage Balance K3< 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0688   Voltage Balance Kpoly< 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P923
0689   Confirmation number 1 – 12 1   F1 1 P922 P923
068A – 068F   Not used            
0690 Configuratio n [59N] Filter activation 0 – 1 1   F24 0 P922-3
0691 Logic inputs configuration Logic input 1 VTA     F15b 0 P922-3
0692   Logic input 2 VTA     F15b 0 P922-3
0693   Logic input 3 (P922- P923) VTA     F15b 0 P922-3
0694   Logic input 4 (P922- P923) VTA     F15b 0 P922-3
0695   Logic input 5 (P922- P923) VTA     F15b 0 P922-3
0696-
069F
  Not used            
06A0 Boolean Equa. Pick-up timer eq. A 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06A2   Drop-off timer eq. A 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06A4   Pick-up timer eq. B 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06A6   Drop-off timer eq. B 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06A8   Pick-up timer eq. C 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06AA   Drop-off timer eq. C 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06AC   Pick-up timer eq. D 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06AE   Drop-off timer eq. D 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06B0   Pick-up timer eq. E 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06B2   Drop-off timer eq. E 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06B4   Pick-up timer eq. F 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06B6   Drop-off timer eq. F 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06B8   Pick-up timer eq. G 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06BA   Drop-off timer eq. G 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06BC   Pick-up timer eq. H 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06BE   Drop-off timer eq. H 0 – 360000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P921-2-3
06C0 F + df/dt F1+df/dt1 activation 0 – 1 1 F24 0 P923
06C1   F2+df/dt2 activation 0 – 1 1 F24 0 P923
06C2   F3+df/dt3 activation 0 – 1 1 F24 0 P923
06C3   F4+df/dt4 activation 0 – 1 1 F24 0 P923
06C4   F5+df/dt5 activation 0 – 1 1 F24 0 P923
06C5   F6+df/dt6 activation 0 – 1 1 F24 0 P923
06C6 – 06CF   Not used            
06D0 Communicati on orders tComm 1 delay 0 – 60000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P922-3
06D1 Communicati on orders tComm 2 delay 0 – 60000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P922-3
06D2 Communicati on orders tComm 3 delay 0 – 60000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P922-3
06D3 Communicati on orders tComm 4 delay 0 – 60000 1 1/100 s F1 0 P922-3

Description of Mapping Format


Code Description Products
P921 P922 P923
F1 Unsigned integer – numerical data: 1 – 65535 X X X
F2 Signed integer – numerical data: 32768 – 32767 X X X
F3 not used X X X
F4 Unsigned integer: Modbus speed      
0: 300 X X X
1: 600 X X X
2: 1200 X X X
3: 2400 X X X
4: 4800 X X X
5: 9600 X X X
6: 19200 X X X
7: 38400 X X X
F5 Unsigned integer: parity
0: without
1: even
2: odd
X X X
F6 Trip configuration and Latched functions (part 1)      
bit 0: tV< X X X
bit 1: tV<< X X X
bit 2: tV<<< X X X
bit 3: tV> X X X
bit 4: tV>> X X X
bit 5: tV>>> X X X
bit 6: tVo> X X X
bit 7: tVo>> X X X
bit 8: tVo>>> X X X
bit 9: tAux1 X X X
bit 10: tAux2 X X X
bit 11: t Equation A X X X
bit 12: t Equation B X X X
bit 13: t Equation C X X X
bit 14: t Equation D X X X
bit 15: Reserved X X X
F7a Trip configuration and Latched functions (part 2)      
Blocking logic 1 & 2 (part 2)      
bit 0: tV2>   X X
bit 1: tV2>>   X X
bit 2: tV1<   X X
bit 3: tV1<<   X X
bit 4: tf1   X X
bit 5: tf2   X X
bit 6: tf3   X X
bit 7: tf4   X X
bit 8: tf5   X X
bit 9: tf6   X X
bit 10: df/dt1     X
bit 11: df/dt2     X
bit 12: df/dt3     X
bit 13: df/dt4     X
bit 14: df/dt5     X
bit 15: df/dt6     X
F7b Trip configuration and Latched functions (part 3)      
bit 0: DV/DT1     X
bit 1: DV/DT2     X
bit 2: DV/DT3     X
bit 3: DV/DT4     X
bit 4: F1 + df/dt1     X
bit 5: F2 + df/dt2     X
bit 6: F3 + df/dt3     X
bit 7: F4 + df/dt4     X
bit 8: F5 + df/dt5     X
bit 9: F6 + df/dt6     X
bit 10: tAux3   X X
bit 11: tAux4   X X
bit 12: tAux5   X X
bit 13: tV0der>   X X
bit 14: tV0der>>   X X
bit 15: tV0der>>>   X X
F7c Trip configuration and Latched functions (part 4)      
bit 0: t Equation E X X X
bit 1: t Equation F X X X
bit 2: t Equation G X X X
bit 3: t Equation H X X X
Bit 4: Voltage Balance K1<     X
Bit 5: Voltage Balance K2<     X
Bit 6: Voltage Balance K3<     X
Bit 7: Voltage Balance K< Poly     X
Bits 8 to 15: Not used     X
F8a Blocking logic (part 1)      
bit 0: tV< X X X
bit 1: tV<< X X X
bit 2: tV<<< X X X
bit 3: tV> X X X
bit 4: tV>> X X X
bit 5: tV>>> X X X
bit 6: tVo> X X X
bit 7: tVo>> X X X
bit 8: tVo>>> X X X
bit 9: tAux1 X X X
bit 10: tAux2 X X X
bit 11: Reserved      
bit 12: du/dt1     X
bit 13: du/dt2     X
bit 14: du/dt3     X
bits 15: du/dt4     X
F8b Blocking logic (part 3)      
Bit 0: tAux3   X X
Bit 1: tAux4   X X
Bit 2: tAux5   X X
Bit 3: tV0der>   X X
Bit 4: tV0der>>   X X
Bit 5: tV0der>>>   X X
Bits 6 to 15: Not used      
F9 Unsigned integer: Remote commands      
bit 0: Tripping contact delatched (RL1) X X X
bit 1: 1 st alarm acknowledgement X X X
bit 2: All alarms acknowledgement X X X
bit 3: Remote tripping (to RL1) X X X
bit 4: Remote closing (to programmed output contacts) X X X
bit 5: Setting group change   X X
bit 6: Average and max values reset   X X
bit 7: Reserved X X X
bit 8: Disturbance record remote start   X X
bit 9: Maintenance mode start X X X
bit 10: Remote Command Frequency Disturbance     X
bit 11: Reserved X X X
bit 12: Manual event/fault acknowledgement mode   X X
bit 13: Remote acknowledgement of the oldest event record   X X
bit 14: Remote acknowledgement of the oldest fault record   X X
bit 15: Remote acknowledgement of the "RAM error" alarm   X X
F10 2 characters ASCII
32 – 127 = ASCII character 1
32 – 127 = ASCII character 2
X X X
F11 Reserved X X X
F12 Logic inputs status and configuration      
bit 0: logic input number 1 X X X
bit 1: logic input number 2 X X X
bit 2: logic input number 3   X X
bit 3: logic input number 4   X X
bit 4: logic input number 5   X X
bits 5 to 15: reserved      
F13 Unsigned integer: Logic output status and Fail safe mode      
bit 0: logic output number RL1 (tripping) X X X
bit 1: logic output number RL2 X X X
bit 2: logic output number RL3 X X X
bit 3: logic output number RL4 X X X
bit 4: logic output number RL0 (watchdog) X X X
bit 5: logic output number RL5   X X
bit 6: logic output number RL6   X X
bit 7: logic output number RL7   X X
bit 8: logic output number RL8   X X
bits 9 to 15: reserved      
F14 Unsigned integer: logic outputs configuration (excepted RL1)      
bit 0: selection logic output number RL2 X X X
bit 1: selection logic output number RL3  X X X
bit 2: selection logic output number RL4  X X X
bit 3: selection logic output number RL5    X X
bit 4: selection logic output number RL6    X X
bit 5: selection logic output number RL7    X X
bit 6: selection logic output number RL8   X X
F15a Logic inputs allocation (part 1)       
bit 0: delatch (UNLATCH) X X X
bit 1: 52a X X X
bit 2: 52b X X X
bit 3: external CB failure (CB fail)  X X X
bit 4: Aux 1 X X X
bit 5: Aux 2 X X X
bit 6: blocking logic 1 (BLK LG1)  X X X
bit 7: blocking logic 2 (BLK LG2) X X X
bit 8: change of active setting group (CHANG SET)   X X
bit 9: external start of the disturbance recorder (DIST TRIG)    X X
bit 10: Aux 3   X X
bit 11: Aux 4   X X
bit 12: Aux 5   X X
bit 13: Control Trip    X X
bit 14: Control Close    X X
bit 15: Time synchro      
F15b Logic inputs allocation (part 2)       
bit 0: Reset LEDs X X X
bit 1: VTS   X X
bit 2: Maintenance mode active  X X X
bits 3 to 15: Not used      
F16 Unsigned integer: Information generated by the zero sequence overvoltage function
bit 0: instantaneous information (V0>) or (V0>>) or (V0>>>)
bit 1 to 4: reserved
bit 5: instantaneous information (V0>) or (V0>>) or (V0>>>)
bit 6: time delayed information (tV0>) or (tV0>>) or (tV0>>>)
bits 7 to 15: reserved
X X X
F17 Unsigned integer: Information generated by the overvoltage function
bit 0: instantaneous information (V>) or (V>>) or (V>>>)
bit 1: instantaneous information VA
bit 2: instantaneous information VB
bit 3: instantaneous information VC
bit 4: reserved
bit 5: instantaneous information (V>) or (V>>) or (V>>>)
bit 6: time delayed information (V>) or (V>>) or (V>>>)
bits 7 to 15: reserved
X X X
F18 Long integer X X X
F19a Unsigned integer: LED configuration (Part 1)
Bit 0: V<
Bit 1: tV<
Bit 2: V<<
Bit 3: tV<<
Bit 4: V<<<
Bit 5: tV<<<
Bit 6: V>
Bit 7: tV>
Bit 8: V>>
Bit 9: tV>>
Bit 10: V>>>
Bit 11: tV>>>
Bit 12: Vo>
Bit 13: tVo>
Bit 14: Vo>>
Bit 15: tVo>>
X  X  X 
F19b Unsigned integer: LED configuration (Part 2)       
Bit 0: Vo>>> X X X
Bit 1: tVo>>> X X X
Bit 2: taux1 X X X
Bit 3: taux2 X X X
Bit 4: V2>   X X
Bit 5: tV2>   X X
Bit 6: V2>>   X X
Bit 7: tV2>>   X X
Bit 8: V1<   X X
Bit 9: tV1<   X X
Bit 10: V1<<   X X
Bit 11: tV1<<   X X
Bit 12: f1   X X
Bit 13: tf1   X X
Bit 14: f2   X X
Bit 15: tf2   X X
F19c Unsigned integer: LED configuration (Part 3)   X X
Bit 0: f3   X X
Bit 1: tf3   X X
Bit 2: f4   X X
Bit 3: tf4   X X
Bit 4: f5   X X
Bit 5: tf5   X X
Bit 6: f6   X X
Bit 7: tf6   X X
Bit 8: Frequency out of range   X X
Bit 9: df/dt1     X
Bit 10: df/dt2     X
Bit 11: df/dt3     X
Bit 12: df/dt4     X
Bit 13: df/dt5     X
Bit 14: df/dt6     X
Bit 15: Not used      
F19d LEDs configuration (part 4)      
Bit 0: Boolean equation A X X X
Bit 1: Boolean equation B X X X
Bit 2: Boolean equation C X X X
Bit 3: Boolean equation D X X X
Bit 4: Logic input 1 X X X
Bit 5: Logic input 2 X X X
Bit 6: Logic input 3   X X
Bit 7: Logic input 4   X X
Bit 8: Logic input 5   X X
Bit 9: du/dt 1     X
Bit 10: du/dt 2     X
Bit 11: du/dt 3     X
Bit 12: du/dt 4     X
Bit 13 to 15: Not used      
F19e Unsigned long: LEDs configuration (part 5)      
Bit 0: F1 + df/dt1     X
Bit 1: F2 + df/dt2     X
Bit 2: F3 + df/dt3     X
Bit 3: F4 + df/dt4     X
Bit 4: F5 + df/dt5     X
Bit 5: F6 + df/dt6     X
Bit 6: tAux3   X X
Bit 7: tAux4   X X
Bit 8: tAux5   X X
Bit 9: V0der>   X X
Bit 10: tV0der>   X X
Bit 11: V0der>>   X X
Bit 12: tV0der>>   X X
Bit 13: V0der>>>   X X
Bit 14: tV0der>>>   X X
Bit 15: tVTS   X X
F19f Unsigned long: LEDs configuration (part 6)      
Bit 0: Boolean equation E X X X
Bit 1: Boolean equation F X X X
Bit 2: Boolean equation G X X X
Bit 3: Boolean equation H X X X
Bit 4: Voltage Balance K1<     X
Bit 5: Voltage Balance K2<     X
Bit 6: Voltage Balance K3<     X
Bit 7: Voltage Balance K< Poly     X
Bits 8 to 15: Not used     X
F20a Logic inputs functional status (Part 1)      
bit 0: Blocking logic 1 (BLK LG1) X X X
bit 1: Blocking logic 2 (BLK LG2) X X X
bit 2: Unlatched of the output contacts (UNLATCH) X X X
bit 3: 52a X X X
bit 4: 52b X X X
bit 5: CB failure (CB fail) X X X
bit 6: Auxiliary input 1 (AUX 1) X X X
bit 7: Auxiliary input 2 (AUX 2) X X X
bit 8: Change of active setting group (CHANG SET)   X X
bit 9: External start of the disturbance recorder (DIST TRIG)   X X
bit 10: tAux 3   X X
bit 11: tAux 4   X X
bit 12: tAux 5   X X
bit 13: Control Trip   X X
bit 14: Control Close   X X
bits15: Time synchro   X X
F20b Logic inputs functional status (Part 2)      
bit 0: Reset LEDs X X X
bit 1: VTS   X X
bit 2: Maintenance mode active X X X
bits 3 to 15: Not used      
F21 Unsigned integer: Software version
10: version 1.A
11: version 1.B
20: version 2.A etc …
X X X
F22 Unsigned integer: internal logic data
bit 0: trip output contact latched (RL1)
bit 1: reserved
X X X
F23 Unsigned integer: Self tests results X X X
bit 0: Protection in Service X X X
bit 1: Minor fault X X X
bit 2: Not acknowledged event record   X X
bit 3: Time synchronisation status   X X
bit 4: Disturbance record available   X X
bit 5: Fault record available   X X
bit 6: Reserved X X X
bit 7: Reserved X X X
F24 Unsigned integer: Status of the relay functions
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
X X X
F25 2 characters ASCII X X X
F26 Selection of the default display      
1: RMS value Va or Uab X X X
2: RMS value Vb or Ubc X X X
3: RMS value Vc or Uca X X X
4: RMS value V0 X X X
5: Frequency X X X
6: V1   X X
7: V2   X X
8: RMS values Va (or Uab), Vb (or Ubc), Vc (or Uca), V0 X X X
F27 Unsigned integer: Selection of the type of temporisation
0: DMT time delay
1: IDMT time delay
X X X
F28 Reserved X X X
F29 Unsigned integer: Modbus communication
0: 1 bit stop
1: 2 bits stop
X X X
F30 Unsigned integer: Rear communication
0: Communication non available
1: Communication available
X X X
F31 Unsigned integer: Number of disturbance records available
0: None

25: 25 Disturbance Records available
  X X
F32 Unsigned integer: Selection of the trigger mode for the disturbance recorder
0: Instantaneous information
1: Time delayed information
  X X
F33 Unsigned integer: type of date used by the modbus communication
0: Modbus date
1: IEC date
X X X
F34 Unsigned integer: Latch of auxiliary output relays X X X
bit 0: selection of the auxiliary output relay no 2 X X X
bit 1: selection of the auxiliary output relay no 3 X X X
bit 2: selection of the auxiliary output relay no 4 X X X
bit 3: selection of the auxiliary output relay no 5   X X
bit 4: selection of the auxiliary output relay no 6   X X
bit 5: selection of the auxiliary output relay no 7   X X
bit 6: selection of the auxiliary output relay no 8   X X
F35 Unsigned integer: Disturbance recorder status
0: No record in progress
1: Record in progress
  X X
F36 Unsigned integer: Alarm status (1)      
Bit 0: V0 > X X X
Bit 1: tV0 > X X X
Bit 2: V0 >> X X X
Bit 3: tV0 >> X X X
Bit 4: V0 >>> X X X
Bit 5: tV0 >>> X X X
Bit 6: V2 >   X X
Bit 7: tV2 >   X X
Bit 8: V2 >>   X X
Bit 9: tV2 >>   X X
Bit 10: V1 <   X X
Bit 11: t V1 <   X X
Bit 12: V1 <<   X X
Bit 13: tV1 <<   X X
Bit 14: Control Trip X X X
F37 Unsigned integer: Alarm status (2)
Bit 0: instantaneous information f1
Bit 1: time delayed information f1
Bit 2: instantaneous information f2
Bit 3: time delayed information f2
Bit 4: instantaneous information f3
Bit 5: time delayed information f3
Bit 6: instantaneous information f4
Bit 7: time delayed information f4
  X X
F37 Bit 8: instantaneous information f5
Bit 9: time delayed information f5
Bit 10: instantaneous information f6
Bit 11: time delayed information f6
     
F38a Alarm status for Boolean equations and miscellaneous (Aux inputs, CB supervision, Fout), part 1      
Bit 0: Boolean equation A X X X
Bit 1: Boolean equation B X X X
Bit 2: Boolean equation: time delayed information" X X X
Bit 3: time delayed information "tAUX1" X X X
Bit 4: time delayed information "tAUX2" X X X
Bit 5: Max CB operating time reached   X X
Bit 6: Max CB operations reached   X X
Bit 7: Max CB closing time reached   X X
Bit 8: CB alarm (logic "OR" between bits 5, 6 and 7)   X X
Bit 9: Frequency out of range: fmeasured > fn+20Hz or fmeasured < fn-20Hz   X X
Bit 10: Boolean equation C X X X
Bit 11: Boolean equation D X X X
Bit 12: Frequency out of range due to undervoltage blocking     X
Bit 13: time delayed information "tAUX3"   X X
Bit 14: time delayed information "tAUX4"   X X
Bit 15: time delayed information "tAUX5"   X X
F38b Alarm status for Boolean equations, part 2      
Bit 0: Boolean equation E X X X
Bit 1: Boolean equation F X X X
Bit 2: Boolean equation G X X X
Bit 3: Boolean equation H X X X
Bits 4 to 15: Not used X X X
F39 Output relays command in Maintenance mode
bit 0: RL1 (trip)
bit 1: RL2
bit 2: RL3
bit 3: RL4
bit 4: RL0 (watch-dog)
bit 5: RL5
bit 6: RL6
bit 7: RL7
bit 8: RL8
X X X
F40 Reserved      
F41 Unsigned integer: Rear communication protocol (RS485)
0: Modbus RTU
1: Courier KBus
2: IEC 60870-5-103
X X X
F42 Unsigned integer: Time period for calculation of average/max values 5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 min   X X
F45 Unsigned integer: MiCOM relay status
Bit 0: Watchdog
Bit 1: Communication failure
Bit 2: EEPROM data failure
Bit 3: Analog failure
Bit 4: Datation
Bit 5: EEPROM calibration failure
Bit 6: RAM memory failure
Bit 7: reserve 7
Bit 8: Maintenance mode
Bit 9: Default settings
Bit 10: main power supply
Bit 11: auxiliary power supplies
Bit 12: transformers offset failure
Bit 13 to 15: reserved
X X X
F46 Unsigned integer: Remote controls 3      
Bit 0: Reserved   X X
Bit 1: Reserved (R&D)   X X
Bit 2: Acknowledgement of the oldest disturbance record (manually) X X X
Bit 3: CB operations number Reset X X X
Bit 4: Reserved X X X
Bit 5: Reserved X X X
Bit 6: LEDs reset   X X
Bit 7: End of Maintenance mode   X X
Bit 8: Communication order 1 X X X
Bit 9: Communication order 2 X X X
Bit 10: Communication order 3   X X
Bit 11: Communication order 4   X X
Bit 12: Data records reset   X X
Bit 13: Reserved   X X
Bit 14: Reserved   X X
Bit 15: Reserved   X X
F47 Unsigned integer: Information generated by the undervoltage protection
Bit 0: instantaneous information threshold phase (V<) or (V<<) or (V<<<)
Bit 1: instantaneous information VA
Bit 2: instantaneous information VB
Bit 3: instantaneous information VC
Bit 4: reserved
Bit 5: instantaneous information (V<) or (V<<) or (V<<<)
Bit 6: time delayed information (tV<) or (tV<<) or (tV<<<)
Bits 7 to 15: reserved
X X X
F48 Unsigned integer: Information generated by the "Negative seq. Overvoltage" and "Positive seq. undervoltage"
Bit 0: instantaneous information threshold V2>
Bit 1: instantaneous information V2>
Bit 2: time delayed information V2>
Bit 3: instantaneous information threshold V2>>
Bit 4: instantaneous information V2>>
Bit 5: time delayed information V2 >>
  X X
Bit 6: instantaneous information threshold V1<
Bit 7: instantaneous information V1<
Bit 8: time delayed information V1<
Bit 9: instantaneous information threshold V1<<
Bit 10: instantaneous information V1<<
Bit 11: time delayed information V1<<
Bits 12 to 15 reserved
  X X
F49 Unsigned integer: Information generated by the frequency protection
Bit 0: Frequency protection
Bit 1: Instantaneous information
Bit 2: Time delayed information of the frequency protection
Bit 3 to Bit 15: Reserved
  X X X X X X
F50 Unsigned integer: type of the voltage applied to the logic inputs
0: DC voltage
1: AC voltage
X X X
F51 Unsigned long integer X X X
F52 Unsigned integer: Voltage connection
0: Connection "3Vpn"
1: Connection "3Vpn+Vr"
2: Connection "2Upp+Vr"
3: Connection "3Upp+Vr"
X X X
F53 Unsigned integer: Configuration of the voltage protection
0: "PROTECT P-N" = phase voltage protection
1: "PROTECT P-P" = line voltage protection
X X X
F54 Do not use      
F55 Unsigned integer: Configuration of the under/overvoltage thresholds
0: Disabled
1: "OR" detection
2: "AND" detection
X X X
F56 Unsigned integer: Configuration of the frequency thresholds
0: Disabled
1: Underfrequency
2: Overfrequency
  X X
F57 Unsigned integer: trigger mode of the frequency disturbance record 0: start of a time delayed df/dt information
1: activation of a logic equation
2: closing of the tripping relay contact ( RL1 )
    X
F58 Unsigned integer: information generated by the rate of change of frequency function
Bit 0: df/dt1 instantaneous information
Bit 1: df/dt2 instantaneous information
Bit 2: df/dt3 instantaneous information
Bit 3: df/dt4 instantaneous information
Bit 4: df/dt5 instantaneous information
Bit 5: df/dt6 instantaneous information
    X
F59 Unsigned integer: selection of the Date format
0: Private date format
1: Date Format IEC
  X X
F60 Active group changing
0: Remote control, or HMI order.(MENU)
1: On LEVEL (high or low) of a logic input.
  X X
F61 du/dt state
bit 0: Reserved
bit 1: Instantaneous information Ua
bit 2: Instantaneous information Ub
bit 3: Instantaneous information Uc
bit 4: Reserved
bit 5: Start
bits 6 à 15: Reserved
    X
F62 du/dt activation:
0: Not activated
1: MIN OR: Logic OR on negative du/dt
2: MIN AND: Logic AND on negative du/dt
3: MAX OR: Logic OR on positive du/dt
4: MAX AND: Logic AND on positive du/dt
     
F63 Measurements transmission enabling for IEC870-5-103 communication
0: None
1: On trip protection
2: On instantaneous protection
3: On communication order
4: On logic input order
5: No disturbance
     
F64 VTS, Blocked functions 
Bit 0: U< blocked by VTS
Bit 1: U> blocked by VTS
Bit 2: V0> blocked by VTS
Bit 3: V1< blocked by VTS
Bit 4: V2> blocked by VTS
Bit 5: F blocked by VTS
Bit 6: df/dt blocked by VTS
Bit 7: du/dt blocked by VTS
Bits 8 to 15: Reserved
  X X
F65 VTS, Detection mode
Bit 0: VTS Input
Bit 1: V0 Measure
  X X
F66 VTS status
Bits 0 to 4: Not used
Bit 5: Start
Bit 6: Trip
Bits 7 to 15: Not used
  X X
F67 F + df/dt status
Bits 0: F1 + df/dt1
Bits 1: F2 + df/dt2
Bits 2: F3 + df/dt3
Bits 3: F4 + df/dt4
Bits 4: F5 + df/dt5
Bits 5: F6 + df/dt6
Bits 6 to 15: Not used
    X
F68 Status IEC103
Bit 0: General start
Bit 1: …………….
     
F69 Not used      
F70 First operator for boolean equations
0: Nothing
1: NOT
X X X
F71 Others than first operator for boolean equations
0: OR
1: OR NOT
2: AND
3: AND NOT
X X X
F72 Equations operands 0000h: NULL (Default)
0001h: U<, 0002h: tU<
0003h: U<<, 0004h: tU<<
0005h: U<<<, 0006h: tU<<<
0007h: U>, 0008h: tU>
0009h: U>>, 000Ah: tU>>
000Bh: U>>>, 000Ch: tU>>>
000Dh: Vo>, 000Eh: tVo>
000Fh: Vo>>, 0010h: tVo>>
0011h: Vo>>>, 0012h: tVo>>>
0013h: V2>, 0014h: tV2>
0015h: V2>>, 0016h: tV2>>
0017h: V1<, 0018h: tV1<
0019h: V1<<, 001Ah: tV1<<
001Bh: f1, 001Ch: tf1
001Dh: f2, 001Eh: tf2
001Fh: f3, 0020h: tf3
X X X
F72 (cont’d) 0021h: f4, 0022h: tf4,
0023h: f5, 0024h: tf5,
0025h: f6, 0026h: tf6,
0027h: tAux1, 0028h: tAux2, 0029h: tAux3,
002Ah: tAux4, 002Bh: tAux5,
002Ch: CB ALARM, 002Dh: CB FAIL,
002Eh: df/dt 1, 002Fh: df/dt 2,
0030h: df/dt 3, 0031h: df/dt 4,
0032h: df/dt 5, 0033h: df/dt 6,
0034h: Input 1, 0035h: Input 2,
0036h: Input 3, 0037h: Input 4, 0038h: Input 5,
0039h: DU/DT1, 003Ah: DU/DT2, 003Bh: DU/DT3, 003Ch: DU/DT4,
003Dh: Output of Equation A, 003Eh: Output of Equation B,
003Fh: Output of Equation C, 0040h: Output of Equation D,
0041h: Output of Equation E, 0042h: Output of Equation F,
0043h: Output of Equation G, 0044h: Output of Equation H,
 0045h: tVTS,
0046h: F1+ df/dt1, 0047h: F2 + df/dt2, 0048h: F3 + df/dt3,
0049h: F4 + df/dt4, 004Ah: F5 + df/dt5, 004Bh: F6 + df/dt6,
004Ch: Frequency out,
004Dh: Vo der>, 004Eh: tVo der> ,
004Fh: Vo der>>, 0050h: tVo der>> ,
0051h: Vo der>>>, 0052h: tVo der>>>,
0053h: K1<, 0054h: K2<, 0055h: K3<, 0056h: K< Poly
X X X
F73 LEDs status (bit = 1 if LED lighted)
Bit 0 – Trip LED
Bit 1 – Alarm LED
Bit 2 – Warning LED
Bit 3 – Healthy LED (always active)
Bit 4 – LED 5
Bit 5 – LED 6
Bit 6 – LED 7
Bit 7 – LED 8
X X X
F74 Keyboard remote control Activation of only one bit at a time. The activated bit simulates a key pressure.
bit 0: CLEAR key
bit 1: ALARM key
bit 2: UP key
bit 3: RIGHT key
bit 4: ENTER key
bit 5: DOWN key
bit 6: LEFT key
bit 7:
bit 8:
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15: Dialog re-init (factory test reserved)
X X X
F75 Unsigned integer: Alarm status (3)      
Bit 0: V0 der >   X X
Bit 1: tV0 der >   X X
Bit 2: V0 der >>   X X
Bit 3: tV0 der >>   X X
Bit 4: V0 der >>>   X X
Bit 5: tV0 der >>>   X X
Bits 6 to 15: Not used   X X
F76 IEC-103 protocol: GI selection (General Interrogation)
0 – Basic GI
1 – Advanced GI
  X X
F77 IEC-103 protocol: Type of uploaded spontaneous events
( 0 = transmission disabled, 1 = transmission enabled)
Bit 0 – IEC
Bit 1 – Private
  X X
F78 IEC-103 protocol: Type of Measurements
( 0 = transmission disabled, 1 = transmission enabled)
Bit 0 – ASDU 3.4
Bit 1 – ASDU 9
Bit 2 – other ASDUs (ASDU 77)
  X X
F79 IEC-103 protocol: Signal & Measurements / Commands blocking
( 0 = unblocked, 1 = blocked)
Bit 0 – Signals & measurements
Bit 1 – Commands
  X X
F80 to F97 not yet defined.      
F98 Auxiliary power self-test status
Bit 0: -3V3 out of range
Bit 1: 5V0 out of range
Bit 2: 3V3 out of range
Bit 3: 12V out of range
Bit 4: 1V3 out of range
Bit 5: 0V out of range
X X X
F99 Transformer self-test status
bit 0: transformer 1 fault
bit 1: transformer 2 fault
bit 2: transformer 3 fault
bit 3: transformer 4 fault
bit 4: transformer 5 fault
bit 5: transformer 6 fault
bit 6: transformer 7 fault
bit 7: transformer 8 fault
bit 8: transformer 9 fault
X X X

Easergy MiCOM P44x M/Nd7 setting parameters & highlights (SC5011)


Overview

Easergy MiCOM P44x provides high speed and high performance distance protection for all overhead lines and cable applications and offers a comprehensive range of protection functions as standard.

This post covers the specific versions of the MiCOM P44x (P442 & P444) products with:

  • Hardware suffix: M
  • Software sufix: E3

For more detailed information on “Easergy MiCOM P44x” relays, refer to Schneider protection relays manuals.

To see other supported devices, click here.


Configuration settings

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
09 00 CONFIGURATION    
This column contains all the general configuration options
09 01 Restore Defaults No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = All Settings, 2 = Setting Group 1, 3 = Setting Group 2, 4 = Setting Group 3, 5 = Setting Group 4
Setting to restore a setting group to factory default settings.
To restore the default values to the settings in any Group settings, set the ’restore defaults’ cell to the relevant Group number. Alternatively it is possible to set the ’restore defaults’ cell to ’all settings’ to restore the default values to all of the IED’s settings, not just the Group settings.
The default settings will initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the IED after they have been confirmed by the user.
Note: Restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
09 02 Setting Group Select via Menu 0 = Select via Menu or 1 = Select via Opto
Allows setting group changes to be initiated via Opto Input or via Menu
09 03 Active Settings Group 1 0 = Group 1, 1 = Group 2, 2 = Group 3, 3 = Group 4
Selects the active setting group.
09 04 Save Changes No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Save, 2 = Abort
Saves all IED settings.
09 05 Copy From Group 1 0 = Group 1, 1 = Group 2, 2 = Group 3, 3 = Group 4
Allows displayed settings to be copied from a selected setting group
09 06 Copy to No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3
Allows displayed settings to be copied to a selected setting group
09 07 Setting Group 1 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enables or disables Group 1 settings. If the setting is disabled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
09 08 Setting Group 2 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enables or disables Group 2 settings. If the setting is disabled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
09 09 Setting Group 3 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enables or disables Group 3 settings. If the setting is disabled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
09 0A Setting Group 4 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enables or disables Group 4 settings. If the setting is disabled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
09 0D Dist. Protection Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Distance Protection function.
09 10 Power-Swing Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Power-Swing function.
09 11 Back-up I> Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Backup I> Protection function.
09 12 Neg Sequence O/C Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection function. I2> stages: ANSI 46/67
09 13 Broken Conductor Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Broken Conductor function. I2/I1> stage: ANSI 46
09 14 Earth Fault PROT Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Earth Fault O/C or 2 = Zero Seq. Power
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the back up Earth Fault Protection function. IN >stages: ANSI 50N/51N/67N
09 15 Aided D.E.F Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Aided D.E.F Protection function.
09 16 Volt Protection Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Voltage Protection (under/overvoltage/remote) function. V<, V> stages: ANSI 27/59
09 17 CB Fail & I< Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Circuit Breaker Fail Protection function: ANSI 50BF.
09 18 Supervision Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Supervision (VTS & CTS) functions: ANSI 47/27/46.
09 19 System Checks Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the System Checks (Check Sync. and Voltage Monitor) function: ANSI 25.
09 1A Thermal Overload Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Thermal Overload Protection function. ANSI 49.
09 1C I< Protection Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the I< Protection function.
09 1D Residual O/V NVD Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Residual Over Voltage Protection function.
09 1E Freq Protection Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Frequency Protection function.
09 24 Internal A/R Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Internal Autoreclose function.
09 25 Input Labels Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the Input Labels menu visible further on in the IED setting menu.
09 26 Output Labels Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the Output Labels menu visible further on in the IED setting menu.
09 28 CT & VT Ratios Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the Current & Voltage Transformer Ratios menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
09 29 Record Control Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the Record Control menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
09 2A Disturb Recorder Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the Disturbance Recorder menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
09 2B Measure’t Setup Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the Measurement Setup menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
09 2C Comms Settings Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the Communications Settings menu visible further on in the IED settings menu. These are the settings associated with the 1st and 2nd rear communications ports
09 2D Commission Tests Invisible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the Commissioning Tests menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
09 2E Setting Values Secondary 0 = Primary, 1 = Secondary
This affects all protection settings that are dependent upon CT and VT ratios. All subsequent settings input must be based in terms of this reference.
09 2F Control Inputs Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Activates the Control Input status and operation menu further on in the IED setting menu.
09 35 Ctrl I/P Config Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the Control Input Configuration menu visible further on in the IED setting menu.
09 36 Ctrl I/P Labels Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the Control Input Labels menu visible further on in the IED setting menu.
09 39 Direct Access Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Defines whether direct access is allowed or not. The front direct access keys that are used as a short cut function of the menu may be:
Disabled – No function visible on the LCD.
Enabled – All control functions mapped to the Hotkeys and Control Trip/Close are available. Not available on Chinese version relays.
09 40 InterMicom Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) InterMiCOM.
09 48 PB CONFIG Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the PB CONFIG menu visible in the relay setting menu.
09 50 Function Key Visible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Sets the Function Key menu visible further on in the IED setting menu.
09 70 VIR I/P Labels Invisible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
This makes the virtual inputs label settings visible or invisible.
09 80 VIR O/P Labels Invisible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
This makes the virtual outputs label settings visible or invisible.
09 90 Usr Alarm Labels Invisible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
This makes the user alarm labels settings visible or invisible.
09 FB RP1 Read Only Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable Remote Read Only Mode on RP1 courier or IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol.
Visible when comms options are: 1 – Courier, 3 – CS103, 6&G – IEC61850 with 1st Rear Courier, 7&H – IEC61850 with 1st Rear CS103.
09 FC RP2 Read Only Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable Remote Read Only Mode on RP2 courier communication protocol. Visible when hardware options are: 7, 8, E or F.
09 FD NIC Read Only Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable Remote Read Only Mode on the Network Interface card (IEC 61850 tunneled courier).
Visible when comms options are: 6&G – IEC61850 with 1st Rear Courier, 7&H – IEC61850 with 1st Rear CS103, B&L- IEC61850 with DNPoE with DNP .
09 FE SettingValueBeh. Independent 0 = Independent, 1 = Locked Mode
When [09FE] = Independent, the IED will behave as original design. That means, [092E] Setting Values is independent for each interfaces
09 FF LCD Contrast 11 0 to 31 (step 1)
Sets the LCD contrast.

Distance Zone Settings

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
30 00 GROUP 1: DISTANCE ELEMENT    
GROUP1: Distance Elements
30 01 Line setting    
Set the parameters for Protected Line in the following settings
30 02 Line Length 100km From 0.3km to 1000km step 10m
Setting of the protected line/cable length in km or in miles. This setting is available if MEASURE’T SETUP column is selected as ’Visible’ in the CONFIGURATION column. The unit (km or miles) depends on the ’Distance unit’ setting in the MEASURE’T SETUP column.
30 03 Line Length 62mi From 0.2mi to 625mi step 0.005mi
Setting of the protected line/cable length in km or in miles. This setting is available if MEASURE’T SETUP column is selected as ’Visible’ in the CONFIGURATION column. The unit (km or miles) depends on the ’Distance unit’ setting in the MEASURE’T SETUP column.
30 04 Line Impedance 12Ω From 0.001/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.001/In Ω
Setting for protected line/cable positive sequence impedance in either primary or secondary terms, depending on the “Setting Values” reference chosen in the CONFIGURATION column. The set value is used for Fault locator, and for all distance zone reaches calculation if ’Simple’ setting mode under “GROUP x LINE PARAMETERS” is selected. This line parameter can be set in polar or rectangular form (see section P44x/EN AP for a complete description)
30 05 Line Angle 70° From -90° to 90° step 0.1°
Setting of the line angle (line positive sequence impedance angle). This setting can be set in polar or rectangular form (see section P44x/EN AP).
30 06 Zone Setting    
Set the parameters for Protected Zone in the following settings
30 07 Zone Status 110110(bin) Bit 00 (last digit)=Z1X enabled Bit 01=Z2 enabled Bit 02=Zp enabled Bit 03=Zq enabled Bit 04=Z3 enabled Bit 05 (first digit)=Z4 enabled
Zone Status: Distance protection zones can be enabled or disabled individually. Setting the relevant bit to 1 will enable the zone. Zone 1 should be always enabled. The other zones should be enabled when required (for use in channel aided schemes).
If Z3 is disabled, the forward limit element becomes the smaller zone (Zp if selected forward)
If Z3 & Zp Fwd are disabled, the forward limit element becomes Z2 If Z3 & Zp Fwd & Z2 are disabled, the forward limit element becomes Z1
If Z4 is disabled, the directional limit for the fordward zone is 30°. Z4 is always reverse.
The following settings are displayed when the relevant zone is enabled. See P44x/EN AP for complete description and calculation for these elements.
30 08 kZ1 Res Comp 1 0 to 7 step 0.001
Zone 1 compensation (KZ1 residual compensation and kZ1 angle, refer to section P44x/EN AP for zone setting
30 09 kZ1 Angle From -180° to 180° step 0.1°
Zone 1 compensation (KZ1 residual compensation and kZ1 angle, refer to section P44x/EN AP for zone setting
30 0A Z1 10Ω From 0.001/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.001/In Ω
Zone 1 impedance setting.
30 0B Z1X 15Ω From 0.001/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.001/In Ω
Z1X impedance setting for Z1 extension schemes.
30 0C R1G 10Ω From 0/In Ω to 400/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
R1G: Resistive reach (Earth fault element, refer to P44x/EN AP for resistive reach calculation (earth and phase) setting)
30 0D R1Ph 10Ω From 0/In Ω to 400/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
R1Ph: Resistive reach (phase fault element, refer to P44x/EN AP for resistive reach calculation (earth and phase) settings).
30 0E tZ1 0s From 0 to 10 step 2ms
Zone 1 time delay (TZ1): Zone 1 time delay setting (refer to P44x/EN AP for setting).
30 0F kZ2 Res Comp 1 0 to 7 step 0.001
Zone 2 compensation (KZ2 residual compensation and kZ2 angle, refer to section P44x/EN AP for zone setting
30 10 kZ2 Angle From -180° to 180° step 0.1°
Zone 2 compensation (KZ2 residual compensation and kZ2 angle) setting.
30 11 Z2 20Ω From 0.001/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.001/In Ω
Zone 2 impedance setting.
30 12 R2G 20Ω From 0/In Ω to 400/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
R2G: resistive reach – Earth fault element setting for zone 2.
30 13 R2Ph 20Ω From 0/In Ω to 400/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
R2Ph: Resistive reach – phase fault elements setting for zone 2.
30 14 tZ2 200ms From 0s to 10s step 10ms
Zone 2 time delay (TZ2) setting.
30 15 kZ3/4 Res Comp 1 0 to 7 step 0.001
Zone 3/4 compensation (KZ3/4 residual compensation and kZ3/4 angle, refer to section P44x/EN AP for zone setting
30 16 kZ3/4 Angle From -180° to 180° step 0.1°
Zone 3 and 4 compensations (KZ3/4 residual compensation and kZ3/4 angle) setting.
30 17 Z3 30Ω From 0.001/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.001/In Ω
Zone 3 impedance setting.
30 18 R3G – R4G 30Ω From 0/In Ω to 400/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
R3G – R4G: Resistive reach – Earth fault elements setting for zones 3 and 4.
30 19 R3Ph – R4Ph 30Ω From 0/In Ω to 400/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
R3Ph – R4Ph: resistive reach – Phase fault elements setting for zones 3 and 4.
30 1A tZ3 600ms From 0s to 10s step 10ms
Zone 3 time delay (TZ3) setting.
30 1B Z4 40Ω From 0.001/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.001/In Ω
Zone 4 impedance setting.
30 1C tZ4 1s From 0s to 10s step 10ms
Zone 4 time delay (TZ4) setting.
30 1D ZoneP – Direct Directional FWD Directional FWD, Directional REV
Zone P direction setting.
30 1E kZp Res Comp 1 0 to 7 step 0.001
Zone p compensation (KZp residual compensation and kZp angle, refer to section P44x/EN AP for zone setting
30 1F kZp Angle From -180° to 180° step 0.1°
Zone P compensation (KZp residual compensation and kZp angle).
30 20 Zp 25Ω From 0.001/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.001/In Ω
Zone p impedance setting.
30 21 RpG 25Ω From 0/In Ω to 400/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
RpG: Resistive reach – Earth fault element for zone P.
30 22 RpPh 25Ω From 0/In Ω to 400/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
RpPh: Resistive reach – phase fault element for zone p.
30 23 tZp 400ms From 0s to 10s step 10ms
Zone P time delay (TZp)
30 24 ZoneQ – Direct Directional FWD Directional FWD, Directional REV
Zone q is a further distance zone. It can be faster or slower than any other zone (except zone 1), and it can be in either direction. The only constraint is that it must be inside the overall Z3/Z4 start-up zone.
30 25 kZq Res Comp 1 0 to 7 step 0.001
Zone q compensation (KZq residual compensation and kZq angle, refer to section P44x/EN AP for zone setting
30 26 kZq Angle From -180° to 180° step 0.1°
Zone Q compensation (KZq residual compensation and kZq angle)
30 27 Zq 27Ω From 0.001/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.001/In Ω
Zone q impedance setting.
30 28 RqG 27 From 0/In Ω to 400/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
RqG: Resistive reach – Earth fault element for zone Q.
30 29 RqPh 27 From 0/In Ω to 400/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
RqPh: Resistive reach – phase fault element for zone Q.
30 2A tZq 500ms From 0s to 10s step 10ms
Zone Q time delay (TZq)
30 2B Other Parameters    
The other parameters are configured in the following configuration.
30 2C Series Cmp. Line Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Series Compensated Line: If enabled, the Directional Line used in the Delta Algorithms is set at 90° (Fwd = Quad1&4 / Rev = Quad 2&3). If disabled, the Directional Line of the Delta algorithms is set at -30° like conventional algorithms
30 2D Overlap Z Mode Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Overlap Z Mode: If enabled, the zones overlap so a fault in Z1 will also be a Z2/Zp/Z3 start (or trip if not cleared) in LCD/Events/Drec – The internal logic is not modified
30 2E Z1m Tilt Angle From -45° to 45° step 1°
The settings dealing with the tilt (’Z1m Tilt Angle’, ’Z1p Tilt Angle’, ’Z2p/Zp/Zq Tilt Angle’) and the evolving forward zone detection to zone1 (to avoid a Z1 detection in case of impedance locus getting out from the quad, due to remote CB operating) but crossing the Z1 before being out from the quad (with enough points that a Z1 decision) can be confirmed if that timer has been set to 0ms.
Z1m and Z1p Tilt Angle: The tilt angles can be independently set (±45°) for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase setting.
30 2F Z1p Tilt Angle From -45° to 45° step 1°
The settings dealing with the tilt (’Z1m Tilt Angle’, ’Z1p Tilt Angle’, ’Z2p/Zp/Zq Tilt Angle’) and the evolving forward zone detection to zone1 (to avoid a Z1 detection in case of impedance locus getting out from the quad, due to remote CB operating) but crossing the Z1 before being out from the quad (with enough points that a Z1 decision) can be confirmed if that timer has been set to 0ms.
Z1m and Z1p Tilt Angle: The tilt angles can be independently set (±45°) for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase setting.
30 30 Z2/p/q Tilt Angl From -45° to 45° step 1°
Tilt characteristic for zone 2, zone P and zone Q (common setting for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase).
30 31 Fwd Z Chg. Delay 30ms From 0s to 100ms step 10ms
This time delay is set to prevent maloperation due to zone evolution from zone n to zone n-1 by CB operation.
30 32 V Mem Validity 10s From 0s to 10s step 10ms
The duration of the voltage memory availability after fault detection can be set. When the voltage memory is declared unavailable (e.g. the V Mem Validity set duration has expired, SOTF Mode, no healthy network to record memory voltage), other polarizing quantities can be considered. These include zero, negative and positive sequence (if voltage is sufficient). Otherwise directional decision is forced to forward.
30 33 Earth I Detect. 0.05*I1 0*I1 to 0.1*I1 step 0.01*I1
The residual current threshold (Earth I Detect.) is used by the conventional algorithm to detect earth faults.
30 34 Smart Zone 0.15 From 0% to 100% step 1%
Sets the ratio “smart zone impedance / load impedance limit Z3/Z4”. If Z3/Z4 impedance exceeds this limit (for more than 20 ms) an alarm is raised.
30 40 Fault Locator    
Fault localtor setting
30 41 kZm Mutual Comp 0 0 to 7 step 0.01
Zone m compensation (KZm residual compensation)
30 42 kZm Angle step 0.1°
Zone m compensation (kZm angle)
30 43 Busbar isolation mode    
 
30 44 Busbar isol.Mode Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Enables or disables Busbar Isolation. ‘Enabled’ setting forces busbar isolation (e.g. for maintenance). In this case, all zones are symmetric, tripping mode is only a 3-pole trip and no scheme logic is used

Distance Protection Schemes

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
31 00 GROUP 1: DISTANCE SCHEMES    
GROUP1: Distance Schemes
31 01 Program Mode Standard Scheme Standard Scheme Open Scheme
The ’Program Mode’ cell is used to select the standard program mode or open program mode. When Standard program mode is set, a standard basis scheme is selectable.
When a scheme is not covered in the Standard modes, the open programming mode can be selected. The user then has the facility to decide which distance relay zone is to be used to program the signalling channel, and what type of aided scheme runs when the channel is received. The signal send zone options, and the aided scheme options on channel receipt are settable.
31 02 Standard Mode Basic + Z1X Basic + Z1X, P.O.P Z1, P.O.P Z2, P.U.P Z2, P.U.P FWD, B.O.P Z1, B.O.P Z2
The following schemes are available when the Standard program mode is selected:
– Basic + Zone 1 extended (see section P44x/EN AP),
– Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip Schemes PUP Z2 and PUP Fwd,
– Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Schemes POP Z2 and POP Z1;
– Blocking Schemes BOP Z2 and BOP Z1.
The PUP, POP and BOP schemes are detailed in section P44x/EN AP
31 03 Fault Type Both enabled Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase, Both enabled.
Fault type setting
31 04 Trip Mode Force 3 poles Force 3 poles, 1P Z1 & CR, 1P Z1 Z2 & CR
Sets the tripping mode: 1-pole trip or 3-pole trip.
31 05 Sig Send Zone None None, CsZ1, CsZ2, CsZ4.
The ’Signal Send Zone’ option is available when an open scheme program mode is set. The user can decide which distance relay zone is used to send the signalling channel:
– CsZ1 or CsZ2 (’Carrier send’ from Z1 or Z2): when a fault is detected in zone 1, or zone 2, the ’Carrier Send’ is emitted from this zone to the relay. These settings are used to configure a permissive scheme.
– CsZ4 (’Carrier send’ from Z4) when a fault is detected in zone 4 (reverse). This setting can be used to configure a blocking scheme. See section decision logic in the section P44x/EN AP.
31 06 DistCR None None, PermZ1, PermZ2, PermFWD, BlkZ1, BlkZ2.
The ’Distance Carrier received’ option is available when an open scheme program mode is set. Aided scheme options on CR receipt:
– Select ’None’ to configure a basic scheme,
– Select ’PermZ1’ or ’PermZ2’ to configure a permissive scheme where Zone 1 or Zone 2 can only trip (without waiting tZ1 or tZ2 timeout) if a signal is received,
– Select ’BlkZ1’ or ’BlkZ2’ to configure a blocking scheme where Zone 1 or Zone 2 can only trip if a Distance Carrier is NOT received,
– Select ’PermFwd’ to configure a permissive scheme where any forward distance zone start will cause an aided trip if a Distance Carrier is received.
31 07 Tp 20ms From 0s to 1s step 2ms
Time setting
31 08 tReversal Guard 20ms From 0s to 150ms step 2ms
Where appropriate, the tReversal Guard and ’Aid Dist Delay’ (transmission time in blocking scheme) time-delays (in the case of a blocking scheme covering the transmission time) settings will appear in the relay menu. Further customising of distance schemes can be achieved using the Programmable Scheme Logic to condition send and receive logic.
31 09 Unblocking Logic None None, Loss of Guard, Loss of Carrier.
Three modes of unblocking logic are available for use with permissive schemes (blocking schemes are excluded):
– None (basic mode),
– Loss of Guard mode,
– Loss of carrier mode.
See section P44x/EN AP for details.
31 0A SOTF/TOR Mode 100000000110000(bin) Bit 00=TOR Z1 enabled Bit 01=TOR Z2 enabled Bit 02=TOR Z3 enabled Bit 03=TOR All Zones Bit 04=TOR Dist. Scheme Bit 05=SOTF All Zones Bit 06=SOTF Lev. Detect. Bit 07=SOTF Z1 enabled Bit 08=SOTF Z2 enabled Bit 09=SOTF Z3 enabled Bit 0A=SOTF Z1 + Rev en. Bit 0B=SOTF Z2 + Rev en. Bit 0C=SOTF Dist. Scheme Bit 0D=SOTF Disable Bit 0E=SOTF I>3 enabled
Sets individual protection zones to enable or disable the TOR / SOTF protection. Setting the relevant bit to 1 will enable TOR / SOTF for the selected zone, setting bits to 0 will disable TOR / SOTF for the selected zone:
– TOR (or SOTF) Zi enabled: TOR or SOTF logic enabled in case of fault in zone i,
– TOR (or SOTF) All Zones: TOR or SOTF logic enabled for all zones,
– TOR (or SOTF) Dist. Scheme: TOR or SOTF logic enabled for aided trip zones,
– SOTF I>3 enabled: TOR and SOTF initiated after detection by I>3 overcurrent,
– SOTF Lev. Detect.: SOTF initiated by level detectors.
See SOTF / TOR section P44x/EN AP for TOR-SOFT logic and SOFT-TOR trip logic.
31 0B SOTF Delay 110s 10s to 3600s step 1s
The Switch On To Fault (SOTF) protection (high speed clearance of any detected fault immediately following manual closure of the circuit breaker) and Trip On Reclose (TOR) protection (high speed clearance of any fault detected immediately following autoreclosure of the circuit breaker).
It is possible to set the time-delay to trip when, for example, the relay has detected a fault that is still present on a feeder after energising.
31 0C Z1Ext Fail Disabled Disabled or Enabled
Enable or disable the “Z1X extension on channel fail”: For the duration of any alarm condition (loss of guard, loss of carrier), the “zone 1 extension” trip logic will be invoked if this option has been enabled.
31 0D Weak Infeed    
Weak Infeed schemes are used when there is a weak source at one end of the line
31 0E WI:Mode Status Disabled Disabled, PAP, Echo, Trip & Echo
Weak infeed logic can be enabled with weak infeed echo option or weak infeed trip option (PAP is a specific customer application).
Refer to Weak Infeed section (P44x/EN AP) for mode status and settings.
31 12 PAP:Tele Trip En Disabled Disabled or Enabled
PAP (Passive Antenna Protection) is a specific customer application.
31 13 PAP:Del. Trip En Disabled Disabled or Enabled
PAP (Passive Antenna Protection) is a specific customer application.
31 14 PAP:P1 Disabled Disabled or Enabled
PAP (Passive Antenna Protection) is a specific customer application.
31 15 PAP:1P Time Del 500ms From 100ms to 1.5s step 100ms
PAP (Passive Antenna Protection) is a specific customer application.
31 16 PAP:P2 Disabled Disabled or Enabled
PAP (Passive Antenna Protection) is a specific customer application.
31 17 PAP:P3 Disabled Disabled or Enabled
PAP (Passive Antenna Protection) is a specific customer application.
31 18 PAP:3P Time Del 2s From 100ms to 12s step 100ms
PAP (Passive Antenna Protection) is a specific customer application.
31 19 PAP:IN Thres 0.5*I1 0.1*I1 to 1*I1 step 0.01*I1
PAP (Passive Antenna Protection) is a specific customer application.
31 1A PAP: K (%Vn) 0.5 0.5 to 1 step 0.05
PAP (Passive Antenna Protection) is a specific customer application.
31 1B Loss Of Load    
The loss of load (LoL) provides fast fault clearance for faults (see P44x/EN AP, LOL section)
31 1C LoL:Mode Status Disabled Disabled or Enabled
Setting that enables (turns on) or disables (turns off) the Loss of Load scheme. When enabled, the loss of load logic provides fast fault clearance for faults over the whole of a double end fed protected circuit for all types of fault, except three phases.   
31 1D LoL:Chan Fail Disabled Disabled or Enabled
The Loss of Load logic can be chosen to be enabled when the channel associated with an aided scheme has failed.
31 1E LoL:I< 0.5*I1 0.05*I1 to 1*I1 step 0.05*I1
LOL undercurrent detector that indicates a loss of load condition on the unfaulted phases, indicating that the remote end has just opened.
31 1F LoL:Window 40ms From 10ms to 100ms step 10ms
Length of  OL window – the time window in which Zone 2 accelerated tripping can occur following LOL undercurrent detector operation.

Power Swing Detection and Blocking (PSB)

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
32 00 GROUP 1: POWER- SWING    
GROUP1: Power-Swing
32 01 Delta R 0.5Ω 0 to 400/I1 Ω step 0.01/I1 Ω
Power swing detection Resistive band which surrounds phase fault trip characteristic (see section P44x/EN AP, section 4.1). Typically, the ΔR and ΔX band settings are both set between 10 – 30% of R3Ph. This gives a secondary impedance between
0.6 and 1.8Ω. For convenience, 1.0Ω could be set.
The width of the power swing band is calculated as follows: ΔR = 1.3 × tan(π × Δf × Δt) × RLOAD
Assuming that the load corresponds to 60° angles between sources and if the resistive reach is set so that Rlim = RLOAD/2, the following is obtained:
ΔR = 0.032 × Δf × RLOAD
To ensure that a power swing frequency of 5Hz is detected, the following is obtained: ΔR = 0.16 × RLOAD
Where:
ΔR: width of the power swing detection band Δf: power swing frequency (fA – fB)
Rlim resistive reach of the starting characteristic (=R3ph-R4ph)
Z: network impedance corresponding to the sum of the reverse (Z4) and forward (Z3) impedances
32 02 Delta X 0.5Ω 0 to 400/I1 Ω step 0.01/I1 Ω
Power swing detection Reactive band which surrounds phase fault trip characteristic (see section P44x/EN AP).
32 03 IN> status Enabled Disabled or Enabled
Residual current power swing unblocking criteria activation:
Enables or disables the earth fault protection during Power Swing Bloc.king. When enabled, the relay will trip when IN > ’IN > (% Imax)’ or when IN < 0.1 × In.
32 04 IN> (%Imax) 0.4 10% to 100% step 1%
Residual current threshold for power swing unblocking. It is a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase.
– Typical setting: 40%
– Minimum setting (to avoid maloperation for asymmetric in power swing currents): > 30%
– Maximum setting (to ensure unblocking for line faults): < 100%
32 05 I2> status Enabled Disabled or Enabled
Negative Sequence current power swing unblocking criteria activation:
Enables or disables the phase-phase fault protection during Power Swing Blocking. When enabled, the relay will trip when I2 > ’I2 > (% Imax)’ or when I2 < 0.1 × In.
32 06 I2> (%Imax) 0.3 10% to 100% step 1%
Negative Sequence current threshold for power swing unblocking. It is a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase.
– Typical setting: 30%
– Minimum setting (to avoid maloperation for asymmetric in power swing currents): > 10%
– Maximum setting (to ensure unblocking for line faults): < 50%
32 07 ImaxLine> Status Enabled Disabled or Enabled
Phase current power swing unblocking criteria activation:
Enables or disables the three-phase fault protection during Power Swing Blocking. When enabled, the relay will trip when phase current threeshold exceeds Imax line >.
32 08 ImaxLine > 3*I1 1*I1 to 20*I1 step 0.01*I1
Phase current threshold for power swing unblocking (unit:A)
– Minimum setting: 1.2 × [ maximum power swing current ]
– Maximum setting: 0.8 × [ minimum phase fault current level ]
32 09 Delta I Status Enabled Disabled or Enabled
Delta I criterion status activation:
Enables or disables the unblocking logic three-phase fault protection during Power Swing Blocking. Time delay is settable.
32 0A Unblocking delay 30s From 0s to 30s step 100ms
Time-delay after which blocking criteria is automatically removed. Typical setting:
– 30s if a near permanent block is required,
– 2s if unblocking is required to split the system.
32 0B Blocking Zones 000000(bin) Bit 00=Z1&Z1X blocking Bit 01=Z2 blocking Bit 02=Zp blocking, Bit 03=Zq blocking Bit 04=Z3 blocking Bit 05=Z4 blocking
Allow zone blocking in case of a power swing.
The Blocked Zones function bits are set to 1 to block zone tripping or are set to 0 to allow tripping as normal.
When the criteria for power swing detection are met (3 single phase loop inside the quad & crossing the ΔR band in less than 5 ms in a 50 Hz network), and when out of step tripping is selected, then the distance protection with all of its stages is blocked – in order to prevent tripping by the distance protection (the relay can operate normally for any fault occurring during a power swing as there are different criteria which can be used by monitoring current & delta current).
32 0C Out of Step 1 1 to 255 step 1
Threshold of number of out of steps. Triggers DDB #352 when reached. Setting of the number of steps to confirm Out Of Step (OOS) condition.
32 0D Stable Swing 1 1 to 255 step 1
f number of Stable Swings. Triggers DDB #353 when reached. Setting of the number of steps to confirm Stable condition

Directional and Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
35 00 GROUP 1: BACK-UP I>    
GROUP1: Back-Up I>
35 01 I>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
Sets the first phase overcurrent threshold (I>1) characteristic.
35 02 I>1 Directional Directional FWD Non Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV
Sets the directional control for the first stage overcurrent element.
35 03 I>1 VTS Block Block Block, Non Directional
When the directional control for the ’I>1’ is set, sets the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) directionality (see section P44x/EN AP). The operation of the VTS will block the stage or will revert to Non-directional upon operation of the VTS.
35 04 I>1 Current Set 1.5*I1 0.08*I1 to 10.0*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the overcurrent threshold.
35 05 I>1 Time delay 1s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with I>1. The setting is available only when DT function is selected.
35 06 I>1 Time VTS 200ms From 0s to 100s step 10ms
If VTS Block is set to Non-Directional the element will operate with this time delay under VTS conditions
35 07 I>1 TMS 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Sets the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS), to adjust the operating time of the IEC/UK IDMT characteristics.
35 08 I>1 Time Dial 7 0.5 to 15 step 0.1
Sets the time dial settings, to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/ US IDMT curves. The Time Dial is a multiplier of the standard curve equation, in order to achieve the required tripping time. The reference curve is based on Time Dial = 1.
Care: Certain manufacturer’s use a mid-range value of time dial = 5 or 7. So; it may be necessary to divide by 5 or 7 to achieve parity.
35 09 I>1 Reset Char DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset / release characteristics of IEEE / US curves.
35 0A I>1 tReset 0s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
35 0B I>2 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
Sets the second phase overcurrent threshold (I>1) characteristic.
35 0C I>2 Directional Non Directional Non Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV
Sets the directional control for the second stage overcurrent element.
35 0D I>2 VTS Block Block Block, Non Directional
When the directional control for the ’I>2’ is set, sets the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) directionality (see section P44x/EN AP). The operation of the VTS will block the stage or will revert to Non-directional upon operation of the VTS.
35 0E I>2 Current Set 2*I1 0.08*I1 to 10.0*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the overcurrent threshold.
35 0F I>2 Time delay 2s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with I>2. The setting is available only when DT function is selected.
35 10 I>2 Time VTS 2s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
If VTS Block is set to Non-Directional the element will operate with this time delay under VTS conditions
35 11 I>2 TMS 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Sets the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS), to adjust the operating time of the IEC/UK IDMT characteristics.
35 12 I>2 Time Dial 7 0.5 to 15 step 0.1
Sets the time dial settings, to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/ US IDMT curves. The Time Dial is a multiplier of the standard curve equation, in order to achieve the required tripping time. The reference curve is based on Time Dial = 1.
Care: Certain manufacturer’s use a mid-range value of time dial = 5 or 7. So; it may be necessary to divide by 5 or 7 to achieve parity.
35 13 I>2 Reset Char DT DT or Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset / release characteristics of IEEE / US curves.
35 14 I>2 tReset 0s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
35 15 I>3 Status Enabled Disabled or Enabled
The third element is fixed as non-directional, for instantaneous or definite time delayed tripping.
35 16 I>3 Current Set 3*I1 0.08*I1 to 32*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the overcurrent threshold.
35 17 I>3 Time delay 3s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with I>3.
35 18 I>4 Status Disabled Disabled or Enabled
The fourth element is non directional and can be used for stub bus protection. If the “stub bus enable” input is equal to 0, the I>4 function operates as a normal overcurrent stage with I>4 time delay, if the “stub bus enable” input is equal to 1, only the I>4 function is active (not I>1, I>2 and I>3) and it operates instantaneously.
35 19 I>4 Current Set 4*I1 0.08*I1 to 32*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the overcurrent threshold.
35 1A I>4 Time delay 4s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with I>4 if no stub bus condition is activated through the binary input "stub bus enable"

Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
36 00 GROUP 1: NEG SEQUENCE O/C    
GROUP1: Negative Sequence O/C
36 01 I2>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
Sets the first negtive sequence overcurrent threshold (I2>1) characteristic.
36 02 I2>1 Directional Non Directional Non Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV
Sets the directional control for the first stage negative sequence element
36 03 I2>1 VTS Block Block Block, Non Directional
When the directional control for the ’I2>1’ is set, sets the VoltWhen the directional control for the ’I2>1’ is set, sets the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) directionality. The operation of the VTS will block the stage or will revert to Non-directional upon operation of the VTS.
36 04 I2>1 Current Set 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the negative sequence current threshold.
36 05 I2>1 Time delay 10s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with I2>1. The setting is available only when DT function is selected.
36 06 I2>1 Time VTS 200ms From 0s to 100s step 10ms
If VTS Block is set to Non-Directional the element will operate with this time delay in seconds under VTS conditions
36 07 I2>1 TMS 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Sets the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS), to adjust the operating time of the IEC/UK IDMT characteristics.
36 08 I2>1 Time Dial 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Sets the time dial settings, to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/ US IDMT curves. The Time Dial is a multiplier of the standard curve equation, in order to achieve the required tripping time. The reference curve is based on Time Dial = 1.
Care: Certain manufacturer’s use a mid-range value of time dial = 5 or 7. So; it may be necessary to divide by 5 or 7 to achieve parity.
36 09 I2>1 Reset Char DT DT, Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset / release characteristics of IEEE / US curves.
36 0A I2>1 tReset 0s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
36 0B I2>2 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
Sets the second negtive sequence overcurrent threshold (I2>2) characteristic.
36 0C I2>2 Directional Non Directional Non Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV
Sets the directional control for the first stage negative sequence element
36 0D I2>2 VTS Block Block Block, Non Directional
When the directional control for the ’I2>2’ is set, sets the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) directionality. The operation of the VTS will block the stage or will revert to Non- directional upon operation of the VTS.
36 0E I2>2 Current Set 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the negative sequence current threshold.
36 0F I2>2 Time delay 10s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with I2>2. The setting is available only when DT function is selected.
36 10 I2>2 Time VTS 200ms From 0s to 100s step 10ms
If VTS Block is set to Non-Directional the element will operate with this time delay in seconds under VTS conditions
36 11 I2>2 TMS 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Sets the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS), to adjust the operating time of the IEC/UK IDMT characteristics.
36 12 I2>2 Time Dial 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Sets the time dial settings, to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves. The Time Dial is a multiplier of the standard curve equation, in order to achieve the required tripping time. The reference curve is based on Time Dial = 1.
Care: Certain manufacturer’s use a mid-range value of time dial = 5 or 7. So; it may be necessary to divide by 5 or 7 to achieve parity.
36 13 I2>2 Reset Char DT DT, Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset / release characteristics of IEEE / US curves.
36 14 I2>2 tReset 0s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
36 15 I2>3 Status Disabled Disabled, Enabled
The third element can be used for instantaneous or definite time delayed tripping.
36 16 I2>3 Directional Non Directional Non Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV
Sets the directional control for the first stage negative sequence element
36 17 I2>3 VTS Block Block Block, Non Directional
When the directional control for the ’I2>3’ is set, sets the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) directionality. The operation of the VTS will block the stage or will revert to Non- directional upon operation of the VTS.
36 18 I2>3 Current Set 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 32*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the negative sequence current threshold.
36 19 I2>3 Time delay 10s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with I2>3.
36 1A I2>3 Time VTS 200ms From 0s to 100s step 10ms
If VTS Block is set to Non-Directional the element will operate with this time delay in seconds under VTS conditions
36 1B I2>4 Status Disabled Disabled, Enabled
The fourth element can be used for instantaneous or definite time delayed tripping.
36 1C I2>4 Directional Non Directional Non Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV
Sets the directional control for the first stage negative sequence element
36 1D I2>4 VTS Block Block Block, Non Directional
When the directional control for the ’I2>4’ is set, sets the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) directionality. The operation of the VTS will block the stage or will revert to Non- directional upon operation of the VTS.
36 1E I2>4 Current Set 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 32*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the negative sequence current threshold.
36 1F I2>4 Time delay 10s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with I2>4.
36 20 I2>4 Time VTS 200ms From 0s to 100s step 10ms
If VTS Block is set to Non-Directional the element will operate with this time delay in seconds under VTS conditions
36 21 I2> Char Angle -45º -95º to 95º step 1º
Where negative phase sequence current may flow in either direction through a relay location, such as parallel lines or ring main systems, directional control of the element should be employed (see section P44x/EN AP). It should be set equal to the phase angle of the negative phase sequence current, with respect to the inverted Negative phase sequence voltage (-V2).

Maximum of Residual Power Protection – Zero Sequence Power Protection

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
3C 00 GROUP 1: ZERO SEQ. POWER    
GROUP1: Zero Sequence Power
3C 01 P0 Status   Disabled, Enabled
Setting that enables or disables the zero sequence power protection.
3C 02 Time Delay Fact. 0s From 0s to 2s step 200ms
Setting for the K time delay factor. The K time delay factor adjusts the IDMT T(s) time-delay. T(s) = K × (Sref/Sr) where:
– Sref = Reference residual power
– Sr = Residual power generated by the fault
3C 03 Fix Time Delay 1s From 0s to 10s step 10ms
Setting for the fixed time delay
3C 04 IN Current Set 0.1*I1 0.05*I1 to 1*I1 step 0.01*I1
Setting for the residual current
3C 05 P0 Threshold 0.5*V1*I1 From 0.3*I1*V1 to 6*I1*V1 step 0.01*I1*V1
Setting to adjust the residual power threshold

Broken Conductor Detection

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
37 00 GROUP 1: BROKEN CONDUCTOR    
GROUP1: Broken Conductor
37 01 Broken Conductor Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Setting that enables or disables the broken conductor protection
37 02 I2/I1 Setting 0.2 0.2 to 1 step 0.01
Setting to determine the pick-up level of the negative sequence to positive sequence current ratio.
37 03 I2/I1 Time delay 60s From 0s to 100s step 100ms
Setting for the function operating time-delay.
37 04 I2/I1 Trip Disabled Disabled, Enabled
Enables or disables the negative to positive current ratio protection. If disabled, only a Broken Conductor Alarm is possible.

Directional and Non-Directional Earth Fault

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
38 00 GROUP 1: EARTH FAULT
O/C
   
GROUP1: Earth Fault O/C
38 01 IN>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
Sets the first earth fault overcurrent threshold (IN>1) characteristic.
38 02 IN>1 Directional Directional FWD Non Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV
Sets the directional control for the first stage earth fault element
38 03 IN>1 VTS Block Block Block, Non Directional
When the directional control for the ’IN>1’ is set, sets the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) directionality. The operation of the VTS will block the stage or will revert to Non- directional upon operation of the VTS.
38 04 IN>1 Current Set 0.2*I1 0.08*I1 to 10.0*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the negative sequence current threshold.
38 05 IN>1 Time delay 1s From 0s to 200s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with IN>1. The setting is available only when DT function is selected.
38 06 IN>1 Time VTS 200ms From 0s to 200s step 10ms
If VTS Block is set to Non-Directional the element will operate with this time delay under VTS conditions
38 07 IN>1 TMS 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Sets the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS), to adjust the operating time of the IEC/UK IDMT characteristics.
38 08 IN>1 Time Dial 7 0.5 to 15 step 0.1
Sets the time dial settings, to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/ US IDMT curves. The Time Dial is a multiplier of the standard curve equation, in order to achieve the required tripping time. The reference curve is based on Time Dial = 1.
Care: Certain manufacturer’s use a mid-range value of time dial = 5 or 7. So; it may be necessary to divide by 5 or 7 to achieve parity.
38 09 IN>1 Reset Char DT DT, Inverse
Setting that determines the reset / release time reset characteristics.
38 0A IN>1 tReset 0s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
38 0B IN>2 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
Sets the second earth fault overcurrent threshold (IN>2) characteristic.
38 0C IN>2 Directional Non-Directional Non Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV
Sets the directional control for the second stage earth fault element
38 0D IN>2 VTS Block Block Block, Non Directional
When the directional control for the ’IN>2’ is set, sets the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) directionality. The operation of the VTS will block the stage or will revert to Non- directional upon operation of the VTS.
38 0E IN>2 Current Set 0.3*I1 0.08*I1 to 10.0*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the negative sequence current threshold.
38 0F IN>2 Time delay 2s From 0s to 200s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with IN>2. The setting is available only when DT function is selected.
38 10 IN>2 Time VTS 2s From 0s to 200s step 10ms
If VTS Block is set to Non-Directional the element will operate with this time delay under VTS conditions
38 11 IN>2 TMS 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Sets the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS), to adjust the operating time of the IEC/UK IDMT characteristics.
38 12 IN>2 Time Dial 7 0.5 to 15 step 0.1
Sets the time dial settings, to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/ US IDMT curves. The Time Dial is a multiplier of the standard curve equation, in order to achieve the required tripping time. The reference curve is based on Time Dial = 1.
Care: Certain manufacturer’s use a mid-range value of time dial = 5 or 7. So; it may be necessary to divide by 5 or 7 to achieve parity.
38 13 IN>2 Reset Char DT DT, Inverse
Setting that determines the reset / release time reset characteristics.
38 14 IN>2 tReset 0s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
38 15 IN>3 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
The third element can be used for instantaneous or definite time delayed tripping.
38 16 IN>3 Directional Non-Directional Non Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV
Sets the directional control for the third stage earth fault element
38 17 IN>3 VTS Block Block Block, Non Directional
When the directional control for the ’IN>3’ is set, sets the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) directionality. The operation of the VTS will block the stage or will revert to Non- directional upon operation of the VTS.
38 18 IN>3 Current Set 0.3*I1 0.08*I1 to 32*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the negative sequence current threshold.
38 19 IN>3 Time delay 2s From 0s to 200s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with IN>3. The setting is available only when DT function is selected.
38 1A IN>3 Time VTS 2s From 0s to 200s step 10ms
If VTS Block is set to Non-Directional the element will operate with this time delay under VTS conditions
38 1B IN>4 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
The fourth element can be used for instantaneous or definite time delayed tripping.
38 1C IN>4 Directional Non-Directional Non Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV
Sets the directional control for the fourth stage earth fault element
38 1D IN>4 VTS Block Block Block, Non Directional
When the directional control for the ’IN>4’ is set, sets the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) directionality. The operation of the VTS will block the stage or will revert to Non- directional upon operation of the VTS.
38 1E IN>4 Current Set 0.3*I1 0.08*I1 to 32*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the value for the negative sequence current threshold.
38 1F IN>4 Time delay 2s From 0s to 200s step 10ms
Sets the time delay associated with IN>4. The setting is available only when DT function is selected.
38 20 IN>4 Time VTS 2s From 0s to 200s step 10ms
If VTS Block is set to Non-Directional the element will operate with this time delay under VTS conditions
38 21 IN> DIRECTIONAL    
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the earth fault overcurrent element.
38 22 IN Char Angle -45° From -95° to 95° step 1°
Earth fault (or, if set in “Polarisation” cell, negative sequence) relay characteristic angle. Comparison of the angle between the earth fault voltage and the earth fault current to achieve directionality (see section P44x/EN AP). It should be set equal to the phase angle of the earth fault current, with respect to the inverted earth fault voltage (-VN)
38 23 Polarisation Zero sequence Zero sequence, Neg sequence
Sets earth fault or negative sequence for relay characteristic angle setting.
38 24 IN> BLOCKING    
Neutral overcurrent blocking setting
38 25 Block Pole Dead Enabled Disabled, Enabled
When enabled, neutral (residual) overcurrent element will block pole dead detection.

Aided Directional Earth Fault (DEF) Protection

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
39 00 GROUP 1: AIDED DEF    
GROUP1: Aided DEF
39 01 Aided ch. Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Directional Earth Fault Element that is used in an aided scheme.
39 02 Polarisation Zero sequence Zero sequence, Neg sequence
Setting that defines the method of DEF polarisation. Either zero, or negative sequence voltage can be taken as the directional reference.
The applications of zero sequence and negative sequence polarisation are described in section P44x/EN AP, section Directional Directional and non directional Earth Fault Protection).
39 03 V> Voltage Set 1V From 0.5V to 20V step 0.01V
The V> threshold defines the minimum residual voltage required to enable the aided DEF directional decision. A residual voltage measured below this setting would block the directional decision, and hence there would be no tripping from the scheme.
39 04 IN Forward 0.1*I1 0.05*I1 to 4*I1 step 0.01*I1
Setting of the netural current threshold in forward direction.
39 05 Time Delay 0s From 0s to 10s step 2ms
Setting of the time delay
39 06 Scheme Logic Shared Shared, Blocking, Permissive
To select shared, blocking or permissive scheme logic.
39 07 Tripping Three Phase Any phase, Three phase
Setting of tripping type, three phase or single phase.
39 08 Tp 20ms From 0s to 1s step 2ms
Aid Dist Delay (if blocking scheme not shared)
Transmission time in blocking scheme. The Aided distribution time-delay (in the case of a blocking scheme covering the transmission time) settings will appear in the relay menu. Further customising of distance schemes can be achieved using the Programmable Scheme Logic to condition send and receive logic.
39 09 IN Rev Factor 0.6 0.1 to 1 step 0.1
’IN Rev Factor’ enhances the sensitivity for the residual current in case of reverse fault (for instance to create a faster blocking logic scheme).
39 0A Block. Time Add. 150ms From 0s to 10s step 10ms
“Block. Time Add.” is an additional time-delay, set to extend a pole dead or convergence detection.

Thermal Overload

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
3A 00 GROUP 1: THERMAL OVERLOAD    
GROUP1: Thernal Overload
3A 01 Characteristic Single Disabled, Single, Dual
Thermal characteristic setting. Available choices are: ’Disabled”, ’Single’ (for line and cable protection) and ’Dual’ (for oil-filled transformers with natural air cooling protection)
3A 02 Thermal Trip 1*I1 0.08*I1 to 3.2*I1 step 0.01*I1
Sets the full load current (ΙFLC) allowed and the pick-up threshold of the thermal characteristic.
3A 03 Thermal Alarm 0.7 From 50% to 100% step 1%
An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be ’Thermal Trip’ = 70% of thermal capacity.
3A 04 Time Constant 1 10 From 1 to 200 step 1
Setting in minutes for the thermal time constant (τ1) for a single time constant characteristic, or the first time constant for the dual time constant characteristic.
3A 05 Time Constant 2 5 From 1 to 200 step 1
Setting in minutes for the second time constant (τ2) for the dual time constant characteristic.

Residual Overvoltage (Neutral Displacement) Protection

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
3B 00 GROUP 1: RESIDUAL O/V NVD    
GROUP1: Residual Over Voltage
3B 01 VN Type Residual Residual, Homopolar
Select VN> settings as residual (3V0) or homopolar (V0) voltage
3B 02 VN>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
Select the residual overvoltage stage 1 as either Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT), Definite Time (DT) or disabled. The following submenus are visible according to this setting.
3B 03 VN>1 Voltage Set 5V From 1V to 180V step 1V
Setting for the voltage threshold of the first stage VN> protection.
3B 04 VN>1 Voltage Set 1.5V From 0.5V to 60V step 0.5V
Setting for the voltage threshold of the first stage VN> protection.
3B 05 VN>1 Time Delay 5s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Operating time delay setting for the first stage definite time residual overvoltage element.
3B 06 VN>1 TMS 1 0.5 to 100 step 0.5
Setting for the Time Multiplier Setting to adjust the operating time of the IDMT characteristic. where K = Time Multiplier Setting (TMS), K = Operating time (in second) and M = measured voltage / relay setting voltage (V<).
3B 07 VN>1 tReset 0s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting to determine the reset/release definite time for the first stage characteristic.
3B 08 VN>2 Status Disabled Disabled or Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage definite time residual overvoltage element.
3B 09 VN>2 Voltage Set 10V From 1V to 180V step 1V
Setting for the voltage threshold of the second stage VN> protection.
3B 0A VN>2 Voltage Set 3V From 0.5V to 60V step 0.5V
Setting for the voltage threshold of the second stage VN> protection.
3B 0B VN>2 Time Delay 10s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Operating time delay setting for the second stage residual overvoltage element

Undercurrent Protection

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
3B 00 GROUP 1: RESIDUAL O/V NVD    
GROUP1: Residual Over Voltage
3B 01 VN Type Residual Residual, Homopolar
Select VN> settings as residual (3V0) or homopolar (V0) voltage
3B 02 VN>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
Select the residual overvoltage stage 1 as either Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT), Definite Time (DT) or disabled. The following submenus are visible according to this setting.
3B 03 VN>1 Voltage Set 5V From 1V to 180V step 1V
Setting for the voltage threshold of the first stage VN> protection.
3B 04 VN>1 Voltage Set 1.5V From 0.5V to 60V step 0.5V
Setting for the voltage threshold of the first stage VN> protection.
3B 05 VN>1 Time Delay 5s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Operating time delay setting for the first stage definite time residual overvoltage element.
3B 06 VN>1 TMS 1 0.5 to 100 step 0.5
Setting for the Time Multiplier Setting to adjust the operating time of the IDMT characteristic. where K = Time Multiplier Setting (TMS), K = Operating time (in second) and M = measured voltage / relay setting voltage (V<).
3B 07 VN>1 tReset 0s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting to determine the reset/release definite time for the first stage characteristic.
3B 08 VN>2 Status Disabled Disabled or Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage definite time residual overvoltage element.
3B 09 VN>2 Voltage Set 10V From 1V to 180V step 1V
Setting for the voltage threshold of the second stage VN> protection.
3B 0A VN>2 Voltage Set 3V From 0.5V to 60V step 0.5V
Setting for the voltage threshold of the second stage VN> protection.
3B 0B VN>2 Time Delay 10s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Operating time delay setting for the second stage residual overvoltage element

Voltage Protection Menu

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
42 00 GROUP 1: VOLT PROTECTION    
GROUP1: Voltage Protection
42 01 V< & V> MODE 00000000(bin) Bit 00=V<1 Trip Bit 01=V<2 Trip Bit 02=V<3 Trip Bit 03=V<4 Trip Bit 04=V>1 Trip Bit 05=V>2 Trip Bit 06=V>3 Trip Bit 07=V>4 Trip
Determines whether the stage will operate the "Any Trip" signal. Visible if either element is Enabled
42 02 UNDER VOLTAGE    
Set the parameters for V< protection in the following settings
42 03 V< Measur’t Mode Phase_Neutral Phase_Neutral, Phase_Phase
Select the undervoltage protection to operate from a phase to phase voltage or phase to neutral measurement.
42 04 V<1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
Select the first undervoltage threshold as either Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT), Definite Time (DT) or disabled. The three following submenus (Voltage, time delay and time multiplier setting) are visible according to this setting.
42 05 V<1 Voltage Set 50V From 10V to 120V step 1V
Sets the pick-up setting for first stage undervoltage element.
42 06 V<1 Time Delay 10s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting for the operating time-delay for the first stage definite time undervoltage element.
42 07 V<1 TMS 1 0.5 to 100 step 0.5
"The following formula defines the IDMT characteristics: t = K / (1 – M),
where K = Time Multiplier Setting (TMS), t = Operating time (in seconds) and M = measured voltage / relay setting voltage (V<)."
42 08 V<2 Status Disabled Disabled, Enabled
Enable or disable the second undervoltage threshold. The voltage and time-delay (following submenus) are settable when V<2 status is enabled. Stage 2 is DT only.
42 09 V<2 Voltage Set 38V From 10V to 120V step 1V
Sets the pick-up setting for second stage undervoltage element.
42 0A V<2 Time Delay 500ms From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting for the operating time-delay for the second stage definite time undervoltage element.
42 0B V<3 Status Disabled Disabled, Enabled
Enable or disable 3rd undervoltage threshold. The voltage and time-delay (following submenus) are settable when V<3 status is enabled. Stage 3 is DT only.
42 0C V<3 Voltage Set 30V From 10V to 120V step 1V
Sets the pick-up setting for third stage undervoltage element.
42 0D V<3 Time Delay 1s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting for the operating time-delay for the third stage definite time undervoltage element.
42 0E V<4 Status Disabled Disabled, Enabled
Enable or disable 4th undervoltage threshold. The voltage and time-delay (following submenus) are settable when V<4 status is enabled. Stage 4 is DT only.
42 0F V<4 Voltage Set 25V From 10V to 120V step 1V
Sets the pick-up setting for fourth stage undervoltage element.
42 10 V<4 Time Delay 1s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting for the operating time-delay for the fourth stage definite time undervoltage element.
42 11 OVERVOLTAGE    
Set the parameters for V> protection in the following settings
42 12 V> Measur’t Mode Phase_Neutral Phase-phase, Phase-neutral
Select the overvoltage protection to operate from a phase to phase voltage or phase to neutral measurement.
42 13 V>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
Select the first overvoltage threshold as either Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT), Definite Time (DT) or disabled (see setting guidelines, section 2.4). The three following submenus (Voltage, time delay and time multiplier setting) are visible according to this setting.
42 14 V>1 Voltage Set 75V From 40V to 185V step 1V
Sets the pick-up setting for first stage overvoltage element.
42 15 V>1 Time Delay 10s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting for the operating time-delay for the first stage definite time overvoltage element.
42 16 V>1 TMS 1 0.5 to 100 step 0.5
"The following formula defines the IDMT characteristics: t = K / (M – 1),
where K = Time Multiplier Setting (TMS), t = Operating time (in seconds) and M = measured voltage / relay setting voltage (V>)."
4604 Sets maximum I> threshold. The setting is used to override a voltage supervision block in the event of a phase fault occurring on the system (where 3 voltages are lost and the line is energized) that could trigger the voltage supervision logic.
42 17 V>2 Status Disabled Disabled, Enabled
Enable or disable the second overvoltage threshold. The voltage and time-delay (following submenus) are settable when V>2 status is enabled. Stage 2 is DT only.
42 18 V>2 Voltage Set 90V From 40V to 185V step 1V
Sets the pick-up setting for second stage overvoltage element.
42 19 V>2 Time Delay 500ms From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting for the operating time-delay for the second stage definite time overvoltage element.
42 1A V>3 Status Disabled Disabled, Enabled
Enable or disable 3rd overvoltage threshold. The voltage and time-delay (following submenus) are settable when V>3 status is enabled. Stage 3 is DT only.
42 1B V>3 Voltage Set 100V From 40V to 185V step 1V
Sets the pick-up setting for third stage overvoltage element.
42 1C V>3 Time Delay 1s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting for the operating time-delay for the third stage definite time overvoltage element.
42 1D V>4 Status Disabled Disabled, Enabled
Enable or disable 4th overvoltage threshold. The voltage and time-delay (following submenus) are settable when V>4 status is enabled. Stage 4 is DT only.
42 1E V>4 Voltage Set 105V From 40V to 185V step 1V
Sets the pick-up setting for fourth stage overvoltage element.
42 1F V>4 Time Delay 1s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting for the operating time-delay for the fourth stage definite time overvoltage element.

Frequency Protection

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
43 00 GROUP 1: FREQ PROTECTION    
GROUP1: Frequency Protection
43 01 UNDER FREQUENCY    
Set the parameters for F< protection in the following settings
43 02 F<1 Status Disabled Disabled / Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the first underfrequency element. The F<1 threshold setting and time-delay (following submenus) are settable when F<1 status is enabled.
43 03 F<1 Freq Set 49.5Hz From 45Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the first stage underfrequency element.
43 04 F<1 Time Delay 4s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the first stage underfrequency element.
43 05 F<2 Status Disabled Disabled / Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second underfrequency threshold (same setting as stage 1).
43 06 F<2 Freq Set 49Hz From 45Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the second stage underfrequency element.
43 07 F<2 Time Delay 3s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the second stage underfrequency element.
43 08 F<3 Status Disabled Disabled / Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the 3rd underfrequency threshold (same setting as stage 1).
43 09 F<3 Freq Set 48.5Hz From 45Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the third stage underfrequency element.
43 0A F<3 Time Delay 2s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the third stage underfrequency element.
43 0B F<4 Status Disabled Disabled / Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the 4th underfrequency threshold (same setting as stage 1).
43 0C F<4 Freq Set 48Hz From 45Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the fourth stage underfrequency element.
43 0D F<4 Time Delay 1s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the fourth stage underfrequency element.
43 0E OVER FREQUENCY    
Set the parameters for F> protection in the following settings
43 0F F>1 Status Disabled Disabled / Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the first overfrequency element. The F>1 threshold setting and time-delay (following submenus) are settable when F>1 status is enabled.
43 10 F>1 Freq Set 50.5Hz From 45Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the first stage overfrequency element.
43 11 F>1 Time Delay 2s From 0s to 100s step 10ms
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the first stage overfrequency element.
43 12 F>2 Status Disabled Disabled / Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second overfrequency threshold (same setting as stage 1).
43 13 F>2 Freq Set 51Hz From 45Hz to 65Hz step 0.01Hz
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the second stage overfrequency element.
43 14 F>2 Time Delay 1s tep 10ms
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the second stage overfrequency element.

Circuit Breaker Fail (CBF) Protection

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
45 00 GROUP 1: CB FAIL & I<    
GROUP1: CB Fail & I<
45 01 BREAKER FAIL    
Set the parameters for Circuit Breaker Failure in the following settings
45 02 CB Fail 1 Status Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage of the circuit breaker function.
45 03 CB Fail 1 Timer 200ms From 0s to 10s step 5ms
Setting for the circuit breaker fail timer stage 1, during which breaker opening must be detected.
45 04 CB Fail 2 Status Disabled Disabled / Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage of the circuit breaker function.
45 05 CB Fail 2 Timer 400ms From 0s to 10s step 5ms
Setting for the circuit breaker fail timer stage 2, during which breaker opening must be detected.
45 06 CBF Non I Reset CB open & I< I< Only, CB open & I<, Prot Reset & I<, Disable, Prot Reset or I<
Setting which determines the elements that will reset the circuit breaker fail time for undercurrent protection function initiated circuit breaker fail conditions.
45 07 CBF Ext Reset CB open & I< I< Only, CB open & I<, Prot Reset & I<, Disable, Prot Reset or I<
Setting which determines the elements that will reset the circuit breaker fail time for external protection function initiated circuit breaker fail conditions.
45 08 UNDERCURRENT    
Set the parameter for Under Current in the following settings
45 09 I < Current Set 0.05*I1 0.05*I1 to 3.2*I1 step 0.1*I1
Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for overcurrent based protection circuit breaker fail initiation.

System Data

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
00 00 SYSTEM DATA    
This column contains general system settings
00 01 Language English English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Chinese (UI only)
The default language used by the device. Selectable as English, French, German, Spanish, Italian and Chinese. Chinese is UI only.
00 04 Description MiCOM 32 to 234 step 1
Editable 16-character description of the unit
00 05 Plant Reference MiCOM 32 to 234 step 1
Plant description: Can be edited
00 06 Model Number Model number <Model number>
Displays the model number. This can not be edited
00 08 Serial Number Serial number <Serial number>
Displays the serial number. This can not be edited.
00 09 Frequency 50 Hz 50Hz or 60 Hz
Sets the main frequency
00 0A Comms Level 2 <conformance level displayed>
Displays the conformance of the relay to the Courier Level 2 comms
00 0B Relay Address 255
1
1
1
0 to 255 step 1 (Courier)
1 to 247 step 1 (Modbus)
0 to 254 step 1 (CS103)
0 to 65519 step 1 (DNP3)
Sets the first rear port relay address.
Build = Courier (Address available via LCD) Build = Modbus (Address available via LCD) Build = CS103 (Address available via LCD) Build = DNP3.0 (Address available via LCD)
00 0C Plant Status   Not Settable
Displays the circuit breaker plant status.
00 0D Control Status   Not Settable
Not used
00 0E Active Group 1 Not Settable
Displays the active settings group
00 10 CB Trip/Close No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Trip, 2 = Close
Supports trip and close commands if enabled in the Circuit Breaker Control menu.
00 11 Software Ref. 1   <Software Ref. 1>
Displays the relay software version including protocol and relay model.
00 12 Software Ref. 2   <Software Ref. 2>
Relay Ethernet card software reference. Visible when Ethernet card fitted.
00 13 Software Ref. 3   <Software Ref. 3>
Relay Process Bus card software reference. Visible when Process Bus card fitted.
00 14 NIC Platform Ref   <NIC platform reference>
Displays the relay NIC platform reference. Visible when Ethernet card fitted.
00 15 IEC61850 Edition 2 1 or 2
Selects IEC 61850 Editions, Edition 1 or Edition 2. This setting can only be changed via HMI and the changes will cause the Ethernet board to reboot.
00 16 ETH COMM Mode Dual IP Dual IP, PRP, HSR, RSTP
Sets the redundancy protocol. This setting can only be changed via the UI and the changes will cause the Ethernet board to reboot.
00 17 PB COMM Mode Dual IP Dual IP, PRP
Sets the redundancy protocol. This setting can only be changed via the UI and the changes will cause the Process Bus board to reboot.
00 20 Opto I/P Status   Not Settable
Display the status of the available opto inputs fitted.
00 21 Relay Status 1   Not Settable
Displays the status of the first 32 output relays.
00 22 Alarm Status 1   Not Settable
This menu cell displays the status of the first 32 alarms as a binary string.
1 indicates an ON state and 0 an OFF state. Includes fixed and user settable alarms.
00 40 Relay Status 1   Not Settable
Displays the status of the first 32 relay outputs.
00 41 Relay Status 2   Not Settable
Displays the status of the next 32 relay outputs. This setting does not apply to P442 relays.
00 50 Alarm Status 1   Not Settable
This menu cell displays the status of the first 32 alarms as a binary string.
1 indicates an ON state and 0 an OFF state. Includes fixed and user settable alarms.
00 51 Alarm Status 2   Not Settable
This menu cell displays the status of the second 32 alarms as a binary string.1 indicates an ON state and 0 an OFF state.
00 52 Alarm Status 3   Not Settable
This menu cell displays the status of the third 32 alarms as a binary string. 1 indicates an ON state and 0 an OFF state. Assigned specifically for platform alarms.
00 53 Usr Alarm Status   Not Settable
This menu cell displays the status of the 32 user alarms as a binary string. 1 indicates an ON state and 0 an OFF state.
00 D0 Access Level ENGINEER Not Settable
Display the Role(s) of the current logged in user, if no one logged in, it shall be "NONE".
00 D3 New Eng.Level PW   ASCII 33 to 122
Allows user to change password for EngineerLevel. Visible on UI only.
00 D4 New Op.Level PW   ASCII 33 to 122
Allows user to change password for OperatorLevel. Visible on UI only.
00 DF Security Feature 3 Not Settable
Displays the level of cyber security inmplemented.
00 E1 Password   <Password>
Used to send encrypted password. Not visible on UI
00 E5 Encryption Salt   <Encryption Salt>
Random data used with encrypted password. Not visible on UI
00 F1 Enter username   <User Name>
User selection for login. Not visible on UI
00 F2 Number of users 2 Not Settable
Shows the number of users configured within the relays RBAC
00 F3 New UI pwd   <Second Simple Password>
Hidden cell reserved for second password modification. Not in use currently.
00 F4 New password   <Encrpted Password>
Allow password change if engineer or operator logged in and CSL0 model. Not visible on UI.

Date and Time Settings

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
08 00 DATE AND TIME    
This column contains Date and Time settings
08 01 Date/Time   <Date/Time>
Displays the IED’s current date and time.
08 02 Date   <Date>
Front Panel Menu only
08 03 Time   <Time>
Front Panel Menu only
08 04 IRIG-B Sync Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable IRIG-B time synchronization.
08 05 IRIG-B Status   Not Settable
Displays the status of IRIG-B
08 06 Battery Status   Not Settable
Displays whether the battery is healthy or not
08 07 Battery Alarm Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enables or disables battery alarm. The battery alarm needs to be disabled when a battery is removed or not used
08 13 SNTP Status   Not Settable
IEC61850 or DNP3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Displays information about the SNTP time synchronization status
08 20 LocalTime Enable Fixed 0 = Disabled, 1 = Fixed or 2 = Flexible
Setting to turn on/off local time adjustments.
Disabled – No local time zone will be maintained. Time synchronization from any interface will be used to directly set the master clock and all displayed (or read) times on all interfaces will be based on the master clock with no adjustment.
Fixed – A local time zone adjustment can be defined using the LocalTime offset setting and all interfaces will use local time except SNTP time synchronization and IEC 61850 timestamps.
Flexible – A local time zone adjustment can be defined using the LocalTime offset setting and each interface can be assigned to the UTC zone or local time zone with the exception of the local interfaces which will always be in the local time zone and IEC 61850/SNTP which will always be in the UTC zone.
08 21 LocalTime Offset 0min From -720min to 720min step 15min
Setting to specify an offset of -12 to +12 hrs in 15 minute intervals for local time zone.  This adjustment is applied to the time based on the master clock which is UTC/GMT
08 22 DST Enable Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to turn on/off daylight saving time adjustment to local time.
08 23 DST Offset 60min From 30min to 60min step 30min
Setting to specify daylight saving offset which will be used for the time adjustment to local time.
08 24 DST Start Last 0 = First, 1 = Second, 2 = Third, 3 = Fourth or 4 = Last
Setting to specify the week of the month in which daylight saving time adjustment starts
08 25 DST Start Day Sunday 0 = Sunday, 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday, 4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday or 6 = Saturday
Setting to specify the day of the week in which daylight saving time adjustment starts
08 26 DST Start Month March 0 = January, 1 = February, 2 = March, 3 =
April, 4 = May, 5 = June, 6 = July, 7 =
August,  8 = September, 9 = October, 10 = November or 11 = December
Setting to specify the month in which daylight saving time adjustment starts
08 27 DST Start Mins 60min From 0min to 1425min step 15min
Setting to specify the time of day in which daylight saving time adjustment starts.  This is set relative to 00:00 hrs on the selected day when time adjustment is to start
08 28 DST End Last 0 = First, 1 = Second, 2 = Third, 3 = Fourth or 4 = Last
Setting to specify the week of the month in which daylight saving time adjustment ends
08 29 DST End Day Sunday 0 = Sunday, 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday, 4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday or 6 = Saturday
Setting to specify the day of the week in which daylight saving time adjustment ends
08 2A DST End Month October 0 = January, 1 = February, 2 = March, 3 =
April, 4 = May, 5 = June, 6 = July, 7 =
August,  8 = September, 9 = October, 10 = November or 11 = December
Setting to specify the month in which daylight saving time adjustment ends
08 2B DST End Mins 60min From 0min to 1425min step 15min
Setting to specify the time of day in which daylight saving time adjustment ends.  This is set relative to 00:00 hrs on the selected day when time adjustment is to end
08 30 RP1 Time Zone Local 0 = UTC or 1 = Local
Setting for the rear port 1 interface to specify if time synchronization received will be local or universal time co-ordinated
08 31 RP2 Time Zone Local 0 = UTC or 1 = Local
Setting for the rear port 2 interface to specify if time synchronization received will be local or universal time co-ordinated
08 32 DNPOE Time Zone UTC 0 = UTC or 1 = Local
IEC61850+DNP3oE versions only. Setting to specify if time synchronisation received will be local or universal time co- ordinated.
08 33 Tunnel Time Zone Local 0 = UTC or 1 = Local
Ethernet versions only for tunnelled courier. Setting to specify if time synchronization received will be local or universal time co- ordinated
08 40 1588 Sync DISABLE 0 = Disabled or 1 = Intfc 1 Enabled or 2 =
Intfc 2 Enabled or 3 = Intfc 1 & 2 Enabled
The setting that indicate the 1588 enable or the Intfc 1,Intfc 2 OR Both.
08 41 1588 DomainNum 0 0 to 255 step 1
The domian number of 1588 which define the scope of PTP message communication, state, operations, data sets, and timescale.
08 42 1588 PdelInterv 0 0 to 5 step 1
The initialization value is implementation-specific consistent
08 43 1588 KP 1.2 0 to 5 step 0.01
The coefficient  Kp value that use calculate the sync time
08 50 1588 Status    
Indication the status of 1588
08 51 InterfaceNum    
The value of the port number
08 52 OffsetFromMaster    
An implementation-specific representation of the current value of the time difference between a master and a slave as computed by the slave
08 53 PeerMeanPDelay    
An estimate of the current one-way propagation delay on the link
08 54 StepsRemoved    
The number of communication paths traversed between the local clock and the grandmaster clock.
08 55 ParentClockId    
The clock clockIdentity of the parent clock.
08 56 ParentPortNum    
The value of parent port number
08 57 ParentClockClass    
The parent clock class which is the attribute defining a clock’s TAI traceability
08 58 ParentClockAcc    
The parent clock accuracy which is the attribute defining the accuracy of a clock
08 59 ParentClockVar    
The parent clock variance which is the attribute defining the stability of a clock
08 5A ParentPriority1    
A user configurable designation that a clock belongs to an ordered set of clocks from which a master is selected
08 5B ParentPriority2    
A user configurable designation that provides finer grained ordering among otherwise equivalent clocks

CT and VT Ratio

Col Row Courier Text Default Setting Available Setting
Description
0A 00 CT AND VT RATIOS    
This column contains settings for Current and Voltage Transformer ratios
0A 01 Main VT Primary 110V From 100V to 1MV step 1V
Sets the main voltage transformer input primary voltage.
0A 02 Main VT Sec’y 110V From 80V to 140V step 1V
Sets the main voltage transformer input secondary voltage. Multiplier M1=[0A01]/[0A02]
0A 03 C/S VT Primary 110V From 100V to 1MV step 1V
Sets the System Check Synchronism voltage transformer input primary voltage.
0A 04 C/S VT Secondary 110V From 80V to 140V step 1V
Sets the System Check Synchronism voltage transformer input secondary voltage. Multiplier M2=[0A03]/[0A04]
0A 07 Phase CT Primary 1A From 1A to 30kA step 1A
Sets the phase current transformer input primary current rating. I1=Phase CT secondary rating.
0A 08 Phase CT Sec’y 1A From 1A to 5A step 4A
Sets the phase current transformer input secondary current rating. Multiplier M4=[0A07]/[0A08]
0A 0D Mcomp CT Primary 1A From 1A to 30kA step 1A
Sets the mutual compensation current transformer input primary current rating.
0A 0E Mcomp CT Sec’y 1A From 1A to 5A step 4A
Sets the mutual compensation current transformer input secondary current rating. Multiplier M6=[0A0D]/[0A0E]
0A 0F C/S Input A-N A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C, C-A
Selects the System Check Synchronism Input voltage measurement.
0A 10 Main VT Location Line 0 = Line or  1 = Bus
Sets the Main VT Location.
0A 11 CT Polarity Standard 0 = Standard or 1 = Inverted
Sets standard or reverse CT polarity.

Schneider Protection Relays – Supported Devices


Schneider protection relays cover all applications in medium-voltage and high-voltage protection, from overcurrent or motor to complex distance protection.

Easergy Protection

Easery P1

Easergy P3

EAsergy P5

Easergy MiCOM Px30 Series

Easergy MiCOM P13x

Easergy MiCOM P63x

Easergy MiCOM P43x

Easergy MiCOM P532

Easergy MiCOM P138

Easergy MiCOM P436 and 438

Easergy MiCOM P638

Easergy MiCOM Px40 Series

Easergy MiCOM P14x

Easergy MiCOM P24x

Easergy MiCOM P341

Easergy MiCOM P34x

Easergy MiCOM P44x M/Nd7 Numerical Distance Protection (SC5011)

Easergy MiCOM P54x

Easergy MiCOM P64x M/Gb3 Transformer Protection Relay (SC5014)

Easergy MiCOM P740

Easergy MiCOM P746

Easergy MiCOM P841

Easergy MiCOM P849

Micom Px10 Series

MiCOM P11x

MiCOM P211

Micom Px20 Series

MiCOM P12x

MiCOM P22x

MiCOM P521

MiCOM P72x

MiCOM P821 T/J31 10E Breaker Failure Protection (SC5012)

MiCOM P92x M/J62 V12D Voltage and Frequency Relays (SC5013)

Vamp Protection

Sepam Series 10

Sepam Series 20

Sepam Series 40

Sepam Series 60

Sepam Series 80

error: Content is protected !!